Title_Page_ReleaseNotes - Cornerstone OnDemand



??Cornerstone February 2016 Release Notes ????? Table of Contents TOC \t "h1,1,h2,2,h3,3" \h \z \* MERGEFORMAT Whats New for February '16 PAGEREF _Toc443057318 \h 7New and Enhanced Permissions for February '16 Release PAGEREF _Toc443057319 \h 28Release Notes Updates PAGEREF _Toc443057320 \h 31February 19 Patch Release Functionality PAGEREF _Toc443057321 \h 37Compensation PAGEREF _Toc443057322 \h 38Compensation Plan - Retain Display Options PAGEREF _Toc443057323 \h 39Compensation Plan - Retain Display Options PAGEREF _Toc443057324 \h 40Compensation Plan Tabs - Display Options PAGEREF _Toc443057325 \h 41Compensation Approval Email Digest PAGEREF _Toc443057326 \h 45Compensation Approval Email Digest PAGEREF _Toc443057327 \h 46Email Digest - Add Section PAGEREF _Toc443057328 \h 48Compensation Task Due: Task Approver Section PAGEREF _Toc443057329 \h 50Connect PAGEREF _Toc443057330 \h 53Edit Community Membership Type PAGEREF _Toc443057331 \h 54Embedded Images and Videos PAGEREF _Toc443057332 \h 56Remove Member or Self from Invitation Community PAGEREF _Toc443057333 \h 59SSO Compatibility with Connect Emails PAGEREF _Toc443057334 \h 62Core PAGEREF _Toc443057335 \h 63AJAX Control Toolkit Update PAGEREF _Toc443057336 \h 64Customize Security on Snapshot Documents PAGEREF _Toc443057337 \h 65Customize Security on Snapshot Documents PAGEREF _Toc443057338 \h 66Folder Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057339 \h 69Folder Preferences - Create/Edit Folder PAGEREF _Toc443057340 \h 71Universal Profile - Snapshot - Documents Widget PAGEREF _Toc443057341 \h 76Snapshot Documents PAGEREF _Toc443057342 \h 78Snapshot Documents - Folder Details PAGEREF _Toc443057343 \h 81Data Load Wizard - User Load Support for Hierarchy Relationships in the Same File PAGEREF _Toc443057344 \h 84Display Inherited Permissions on Reports PAGEREF _Toc443057345 \h 86Ellucian Banner Position Integration PAGEREF _Toc443057346 \h 87Enhanced Web Service Definition Language (WSDL) PAGEREF _Toc443057347 \h 88Global Search Behavior - People Tab PAGEREF _Toc443057348 \h 89Insights Compliance Control PAGEREF _Toc443057349 \h 90Link - Data Load Wizard User Load PAGEREF _Toc443057350 \h 91Link - Use Recruiting and Effective Dating Together PAGEREF _Toc443057351 \h 93New Local System ID Field PAGEREF _Toc443057352 \h 94New Local System ID Field PAGEREF _Toc443057353 \h 95User Record - Local System ID PAGEREF _Toc443057354 \h 97Bio About Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057355 \h 99Bio About PAGEREF _Toc443057356 \h 100Organizational Unit (OU) Localization PAGEREF _Toc443057357 \h 101Organizational Unit Localization Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057358 \h 102Localization End User Experience PAGEREF _Toc443057359 \h 105Organizational Unit - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Toc443057360 \h 106Self-registration Group - Create PAGEREF _Toc443057361 \h 109Preferences by OU PAGEREF _Toc443057362 \h 111Permission Constraints PAGEREF _Toc443057363 \h 112Email Tags PAGEREF _Toc443057364 \h 114Select OU Pop-ups PAGEREF _Toc443057365 \h 115Select User Pop-ups PAGEREF _Toc443057366 \h 118User Cards PAGEREF _Toc443057367 \h 120Predictive Search PAGEREF _Toc443057368 \h 122Custom Reports PAGEREF _Toc443057369 \h 123Organizational Unit (OU) Preferences Optimization PAGEREF _Toc443057370 \h 124Portuguese Language Pack Enhancements PAGEREF _Toc443057371 \h 125Real Time Data Warehouse PAGEREF _Toc443057372 \h 126View OU and User Identifiers in Availability and Group Criteria PAGEREF _Toc443057373 \h 128Web Services Optimization PAGEREF _Toc443057374 \h 130Learning PAGEREF _Toc443057375 \h 131Added Custom Fields for Auditing for Outbound Data Feed PAGEREF _Toc443057376 \h 132Citrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit Increase PAGEREF _Toc443057377 \h 133Citrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit Increase PAGEREF _Toc443057378 \h 134Citrix Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057379 \h 136Event/Session Creation - Maximum Registration PAGEREF _Toc443057380 \h 137Data Load Wizard Test Question Bank and Transcript Load Field Changes PAGEREF _Toc443057381 \h 139Edit Provider for Online Courses PAGEREF _Toc443057382 \h 140Edit Provider for Online Courses PAGEREF _Toc443057383 \h 141Course Publisher - Create New Publication PAGEREF _Toc443057384 \h 142Course Catalog - General PAGEREF _Toc443057385 \h 143Enhanced GetDetails Web Service PAGEREF _Toc443057386 \h 145Learning Object Details Map View for ILT Preview PAGEREF _Toc443057387 \h 146Learning Object Details Map View for ILT Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057388 \h 147ILT Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057389 \h 149Manage Location PAGEREF _Toc443057390 \h 150Search by Geolocation PAGEREF _Toc443057391 \h 151Learning Object Details - Sessions Tab PAGEREF _Toc443057392 \h Content Integration PAGEREF _Toc443057393 \h 158Material Versioning Full Roll-out PAGEREF _Toc443057394 \h 159Material Versioning Full Roll-out PAGEREF _Toc443057395 \h 160Simplified Versioning PAGEREF _Toc443057396 \h 163Versioning with Append PAGEREF _Toc443057397 \h 174General Versioning Enhancements PAGEREF _Toc443057398 \h 177Material - Add Subject PAGEREF _Toc443057399 \h 185Material - Copy Material PAGEREF _Toc443057400 \h 187Material - View History Details PAGEREF _Toc443057401 \h 189Material - View Users PAGEREF _Toc443057402 \h 191Material - View Users Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057403 \h 192Material Administration - View Users Icon PAGEREF _Toc443057404 \h 194Material - View Users PAGEREF _Toc443057405 \h 196Renamed Legacy Forms to Training Forms PAGEREF _Toc443057406 \h 199Renamed Legacy Forms to Training Forms PAGEREF _Toc443057407 \h 200Email Triggers PAGEREF _Toc443057408 \h 202Admin Tools - Learning PAGEREF _Toc443057409 \h 203Admin Tools - Learning - Training Form Management PAGEREF _Toc443057410 \h 204Training Form Administration PAGEREF _Toc443057411 \h 205Training Form Template - Create PAGEREF _Toc443057412 \h 206Training Form Task - Create PAGEREF _Toc443057413 \h 207Training Order Form Administration PAGEREF _Toc443057414 \h 208Training Order Form - Create PAGEREF _Toc443057415 \h 209Training Order Form - View PAGEREF _Toc443057416 \h 211Training Request Form Administration PAGEREF _Toc443057417 \h 212Training Request Form - Create PAGEREF _Toc443057418 \h 213Training Request Form Statuses - Manage PAGEREF _Toc443057419 \h 214Custom Field Administration - Training Request Forms PAGEREF _Toc443057420 \h 215Roster - Add Users Permission Constraints PAGEREF _Toc443057421 \h 217Self-Registration Fields Enhancements PAGEREF _Toc443057422 \h 218Self-Registration Fields Enhancements Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057423 \h 219Address, Country, Prefix Fields PAGEREF _Toc443057424 \h 220Custom Fields PAGEREF _Toc443057425 \h 224Session Roster - Display Additional Information PAGEREF _Toc443057426 \h 226Session Roster - Sign-in Sheet Enhancements PAGEREF _Toc443057427 \h 228Session Start Date Email Trigger - Manager Name PAGEREF _Toc443057428 \h 230Time-out for Online Courses PAGEREF _Toc443057429 \h 231Time-out for Online Courses PAGEREF _Toc443057430 \h 232Online Course Time-out Messages PAGEREF _Toc443057431 \h 235Defect Fix February 2016 Release PAGEREF _Toc443057432 \h 236Mobile PAGEREF _Toc443057433 \h 237Mobile Redesign Auto-Upgrade (New UX) PAGEREF _Toc443057434 \h 238Mobile - Retire Support for Android 4.3 and iOS 7.0 PAGEREF _Toc443057435 \h 251Online Course External Links and Documents PAGEREF _Toc443057436 \h 252Online Course External Links and Documents Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057437 \h 253Open External Links and Documents PAGEREF _Toc443057438 \h 254Performance PAGEREF _Toc443057439 \h 255Goals Redesign PAGEREF _Toc443057440 \h 256Goals Redesign Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057441 \h 257Goals - Create Permission Constraints PAGEREF _Toc443057442 \h 260Goals Configuration - Goal Creation Administration PAGEREF _Toc443057443 \h 261View Goals - My Goals PAGEREF _Toc443057444 \h 263View Goals - Team Goals PAGEREF _Toc443057445 \h 270View Goals - Hierarchy PAGEREF _Toc443057446 \h 275Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Toc443057447 \h 277Goal - Manage PAGEREF _Toc443057448 \h 307Goal - View History PAGEREF _Toc443057449 \h 313Snapshot Goals PAGEREF _Toc443057450 \h 315Universal Profile - View All Goals PAGEREF _Toc443057451 \h 321Manage Shared and Dynamic Goals PAGEREF _Toc443057452 \h 322Performance Review - Goal Planning Section PAGEREF _Toc443057453 \h 323Performance Reviews - Decline to Sign PAGEREF _Toc443057454 \h 324Performance Reviews - Decline to Sign PAGEREF _Toc443057455 \h 325Sign Off Review Section - Decline to Sign PAGEREF _Toc443057456 \h 326Performance Review - Sign Off Section PAGEREF _Toc443057457 \h 328Recruiting PAGEREF _Toc443057458 \h 330ADP Workforce Now Integration for Recruiting and Onboarding PAGEREF _Toc443057459 \h 331Global Recruiting Localization PAGEREF _Toc443057460 \h 332Global Recruiting Localization Overview PAGEREF _Toc443057461 \h 333Frequently Asked Questions PAGEREF _Toc443057462 \h 337Agency Portal PAGEREF _Toc443057463 \h 339Applicant Profile PAGEREF _Toc443057464 \h 341Applicant Experience PAGEREF _Toc443057465 \h 343Application Workflows PAGEREF _Toc443057466 \h 344Candidate Search Query PAGEREF _Toc443057467 \h 351Career Center - Applications Tab PAGEREF _Toc443057468 \h 352Career Center - Refer Jobs Tab PAGEREF _Toc443057469 \h 353Career Center - Resume PAGEREF _Toc443057470 \h 355Career Center - Search Other Jobs Tab PAGEREF _Toc443057471 \h 356Career Site Management PAGEREF _Toc443057472 \h 358Career Site - Applicants PAGEREF _Toc443057473 \h 361Default Requisition Template Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057474 \h 363Email Administration PAGEREF _Toc443057475 \h 364Interview Guide Management PAGEREF _Toc443057476 \h 365Interview Guide Management - Create Guide PAGEREF _Toc443057477 \h 366Interview Management Preferences PAGEREF _Toc443057478 \h 370Interview Manager PAGEREF _Toc443057479 \h 372Job Details Pop-Up PAGEREF _Toc443057480 \h 374Create Job Requisitions PAGEREF _Toc443057481 \h 375Manage Applicants PAGEREF _Toc443057482 \h 379Manage Hired Applicants PAGEREF _Toc443057483 \h 382Manage Job Requisitions PAGEREF _Toc443057484 \h 383Mobile PAGEREF _Toc443057485 \h 384New Submissions PAGEREF _Toc443057486 \h 385OU Localization for Recruiting PAGEREF _Toc443057487 \h 386Recruiting Approvals PAGEREF _Toc443057488 \h 387Recruiting Manager/Recruiter Dashboards PAGEREF _Toc443057489 \h 388Requisition Snapshot PAGEREF _Toc443057490 \h 389Requisition Templates PAGEREF _Toc443057491 \h 390Resume/CV Review Page PAGEREF _Toc443057492 \h 393Review Applicants PAGEREF _Toc443057493 \h 395Suggested Referrals PAGEREF _Toc443057494 \h 397Welcome Page Widgets PAGEREF _Toc443057495 \h 398Onboarding PAGEREF _Toc443057496 \h 399Print Forms to PDF PAGEREF _Toc443057497 \h 400Pre-Screening: Pop-Up and Retire Videos in Questions PAGEREF _Toc443057498 \h 407Recruiting Usability Enhancements PAGEREF _Toc443057499 \h 410Whats New for February '16The following new features and enhancements are available for the February 2016 release as of 05 February 2016: XE "Compensation" Compensation FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release Summary XE "Request" By Request?DescriptionCompensation Plan - Retain Display Options XE "Compensation Plan" XE "Email" Email Digest – Compensation Approval Email?With this enhancement, when a compensation manager configures the display and sort options within a compensation plan, the configured display options and sort orders are applied to all tabs as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan. This enables the compensation manager to navigate between tabs and view all data with the same display configuration without having to set the display configuration on each pensation Approval Email Digest XE "Approval" Compensation Approval Email Digest? XE "User" With this enhancement, a new email digest section is available for Compensation. This enhancement reduces the number of emails a user receives and lowers the chance that an email notification is missed. XE "Compensation Task" Compensation Task Due: Task Approver - XE "Connect" This dynamic section is intended to alert recipients that there is one or more new postings available in the recipient's Connect communities. This dynamic section can be configured to display the details of each new posting. If there has not been a new community posting that is available to the user since the last digest was delivered, then this section is not included in the email digest for the user. Connect FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionEdit Community Membership Type XE "Community" Edit Community Membership Type?With this enhancement, the community membership setting can be edited to enable switching membership from Auto-enrollment to Invitation, or from Invitation to Auto-enrollment. Prior to this enhancement, community membership was designated as Auto-enrollment or Invitation during the create community process, and this setting could not be changed after community creation.Embedded Images and VideosEmbedded Images and Videos?With this enhancement, uploaded video files and images will be embedded in New Connect.Remove Member or Self from Invitation CommunityRemove Member or Self from Invitation Community?With this enhancement, users have the option to unjoin a community that they joined via invitation, and community moderators can remove users from a community that the users joined via invitation. This allows users to remove themselves from communities of which they no longer wish to be a member and provides moderators with greater capabilities in removing users.SSO Compatibility with Connect EmailsSSO Compatibility with Connect Emails?Email links in Connect-related emails will now link to postings for portals that use Single Sign On (SSO). When users click the link in the email, the user is taken directly to the linked posting.This enhancement applies to all Connect emails and email digests.Core FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionAJAX Control Toolkit Update?? XE "Library" With this enhancement, the Cornerstone system is now referencing an upgraded version of the AJAX Control Toolkit. The Cornerstone system uses the AJAX Control Toolkit third-party library for some of its controls such as the Calendar control.Customize Security on Snapshot Documents XE "Security" XE "Snapshot" Customize Security on Snapshot Documents ? XE "Performance" With this enhancement, administrators can customize the security of each folder within Snapshot Documents. This enables administrators to determine for which users a folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page and which users have access to the folder for a specific set of users. With the ability to configure security for each folder individually, organizations can now utilize Snapshot Documents to securely store employee information including legal, job-related, and performance-related documents.Data Load Wizard - User Load Support for Hierarchy Relationships XE "Data Load Wizard" Data Load Wizard – User Load Support for Hierarchy Relationships in the Same File ?With this enhancement, the Data Load Wizard is updated to more seamlessly support loading users and their associated hierarchies (direct reports, approvers, etc.) within the same file. For example, administrators can now specify a manager for a new user even if the manager and the user are both being added to the system for the first time. This greatly reduces the work and rework needed to load a new user along with a new manager or direct report.Display Inherited Permissions on ReportsDisplay Inherited Permissions on Reports?As part of current functionality for security roles, any permission that is added to a child role is also inherited by the parent role. With this enhancement, an Inherited Permission column is added to the Security Role Report output. This column indicates whether or not a permission has been inherited from a child role. The column displays "Yes" if the permission has been inherited by the parent role from a child role, and "No" if the permission has not been inherited from a child role.Ellucian Banner Position Integration?Yes XE "Organizational Unit" An inbound data feed is now available to import data from Ellucian's Banner Position Description system into Cornerstone. The standard integration supports an inbound feed from Ellucian to Cornerstone, which contains the following Position OU data: Description, Responsibilities, Attributes (Education, Skills, Certifications, Exams).Enhanced Web Service Definition Language (WSDL)Enhanced Web Service Definition Language (WSDL)Automatically enabled when web services are in use.In order to support creating organizational units (OUs) for multiple languages, the SetOUlocal parameters are now included within the Web Service Definition Language (WSDL).Global Search Behavior - People Tab??With this enhancement, the People tab of the Global Search page no longer displays any users until at least one search criterion is defined.Insights: Compliance ControlCompliance Control (Previously Released, Available Now!)? XE "Dashboard" Online Help for the Compliance Control Insight is now available. The Compliance Control dashboard helps organizations understand their risk for not meeting compliance requirements for training completion. The dashboard displays widgets that show the number of employees who are at risk for not completing training on time and which trainings are the most at risk (i.e., the trainings that are the most "at risk" courses by number of employees that are at risk for not completing them). The primary risk factors also display, as well as a breakdown of the top at-risk trainings by organizational unit.Link - Data Load Wizard User Load XE "Link" Link - Data Load Wizard Platform User Load ? XE "Data Load Wizard" With this enhancement, when both Link and Data Load Wizard (DLW) are in use, the DLW User Data Load and User Data Feed are updated to accept user information without a User ID. When user data is provided without a User ID, the DLW creates a new user record for the user, and the system automatically creates a User ID for the user.Link - Use Recruiting and Effective Dating Together XE "Recruiting" XE "Effective Dating" Link – Use Recruiting & Effective Dating Together ?With this enhancement, both Recruiting and Effective Dating for Link can be used within the same portal.New Local System ID FieldNew Local System ID Field ?With this enhancement, a new Local System ID field is now available, which enables organizations to store the identifier that is generated by Cornerstone in the User ID field and store the ID from a local HR or Payroll system in the Local System ID anizational Unit (OU) LocalizationOrganizational Unit (OU) Localization Existing clients must contact Cornerstone to enable.With this enhancement, administrators are now able to add localized translations for all standard and custom OUs within the portal. This enables organizations to maintain a single OU structure globally while ensuring that users always see the appropriate value based on their preferred language. As a result, organizations are able to more easily build, maintain, and support their organizational structure within the anizational Unit (OU) Preferences OptimizationOrganization Unit (OU) Preferences Optimization ? XE "Test" This optimization improves the back-end performance for settings that can be configured by organizational unit (OU). Core Preference pages impacted by this update include Languages, Time Zone, Navigation Tabs and Links, Theme and Logo, and Welcome Pages, among others. These updates are entirely back-end and are not expected to impact the day-to-day experience. Although there are no visible changes to these areas, clients are encouraged to test during User Acceptance Testing (UAT) to validate that the experience remains the same. For example, navigate to Time Zones preferences, make a change and save it, then navigate back to ensure the change was properly changed.Portuguese Language Pack Enhancements??With the February 2016 release, Cornerstone is revising the translations for the Portuguese (Brazil) language pack. Over 200 translation changes are made across the portal.Real Time Data WarehouseReal Time Data Warehouse (RTDW)?The Real Time Data Warehouse (RTDW) is a new optimized data warehouse solution, which will replace the existing data warehouse solution currently used by the Cornerstone reporting tools. New hardware and software solutions have been utilized to build a new data warehouse solution. With this solution, Cornerstone will use synchronous replication to ensure that the RTDW is updated within minutes instead of once a day.View OU and User Identifiers in Availability and Group Criteria XE "Group" ??When creating or modifying Availability and Groups, users will now see IDs displayed beside the Organizational Units (OUs) and Users. This gives administrators the ability to easily distinguish between similarly named OUs and Users.Web Services OptimizationWeb Services Optimization ?In an effort to better secure and track Web Service access, Cornerstone is turning off Web Service access for only those clients who have never accessed SOAP APIs. This ensures that Cornerstone is able to more thoroughly track and enhance Web Services going forward. Once disabled, user accounts within the portal are not able to access SOAP APIs. XE "Learning" Learning FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionAdded Custom Fields for Auditing for Outbound Data FeedAdded Custom Fields for Auditing for Outbound Data Feed Yes XE "Course Catalog" With February 2016 release, various fields in the Course Catalog, Material Administration, Curriculum Administration, and Events and Sessions areas of the Learning module are now audited, and the audits are stored to Cornerstone's databases. This allows for stronger tracking and compliance over critical Learning fields.Citrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit IncreaseCitrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit Increase ? XE "License" With this enhancement, organizations now have the ability to launch meetings via Citrix GoToMeeting with up to 100 attendees based on their current license limit. This enables organizations using Citrix GoToMeeting to have access to the full functionality of their applicable portal license. Organizations can control their maximum attendee limit via a new GoToMeeting Attendee Limit field on the Citrix Preferences page.Data Load Wizard - Question and Transcript Load Field Changes XE "Transcript" XE "Question Bank" Data Load Wizard Test Question Bank & Transcript Load Field Changes ?In the Question Bank Data Load, the Reference Number column is renamed to Question Reference Number. This applies when loading questions and question responses. XE "Learning Object" In the Transcript Data Load, the Learning Object/Reference Number ID column is renamed to Learning Object ID/Training Reference Number.Edit Provider for Online Courses XE "Provider" Edit Provider for Online Courses ? XE "Course Publisher" With this enhancement, administrators can now edit the provider for an online course via the Course Catalog. Also, when creating a new publication via the Course Publisher, no default provider is set for a course. Administrators are required to set a provider for the online course upon creating the publication.Enhanced GetDetails Web Service?Automatically enabled when specific web service is in use. If not already enabled, contact Cornerstone via a GPS case to enable this web service. XE "Session" With this enhancement, a PartName field is added to the GetDetails web service response for session learning objects (LOs). The PartName field is the title of the session part.Learning Object Details Map View for ILT Preview XE "Learning Object" Learning Object (LO) Details Map View for Instructor Led Training (ILT) Preview (Invite-Only) XE "Program" Preview Program - Invite OnlyWith the new geolocation and postal code search features, learners can now easily find instructor-led training (ILT) sessions that are taking place near their own or a preferred location. This enhancement enables the process of finding sessions to be more intuitive and accessible.Learning Object Details - Sessions TabLearning Object Details – Sessions Tab ?The Learning Object (LO) Details page for events is easier to navigate with a new “Sessions” tab that separates Session information from other details, ratings and reviews. This change is automatically applied to all new and existing sessions. Content Integration?YesAn integration is now available for . With this enhancement, a scheduled, automated process automatically recognizes any newly created content within the organization's portal. The system then processes the new content and publishes the content within Cornerstone. Outbound SSO is applied to each online course to allow users to seamlessly launch online courses within the Cornerstone system.Material Versioning Full Roll-out XE "Material" Material Versioning Full Roll-Out Simplified Versioning is enabled by default. XE "Action" If you are already using Versioning with Append, no action is needed to continue using.To revert from Simplified Versioning to Versioning with Append, contact CSOD through a Global Product Support (GPS) case.To better support compliance needs and strengthen data integrity, versioning functionality for materials is fully required with the February ’16 Release. Depending on the need, organizations can choose to use either Simplified Versioning or Material Versioning with Append. Simplified Versioning is the default option.Material - Add Subject XE "Subject" Material Administration – Copy, Edit Subject & View History Details ?With this enhancement, administrators can now add one or more subjects to a material when creating or editing the material via Material Administration. An Add Subject link is available on the General page. Administrators can add one or more subjects. Adding a subject to a material is optional.Material - Copy MaterialMaterial Administration – Copy, Edit Subject & View History Details ?With this enhancement, administrators can now copy material LOs from the Material Administration page. The Copy option is available in the Options column to administrators who have permission to manage materials. This option is available for all non-expired materials, including previous versions.Material - View History DetailsMaterial Administration – Copy, Edit Subject & View History Details ?With this enhancement, additional details are now captured in the Modification History section when creating or editing a material via Material Administration. This includes modifications to the material type, provider, and material source.Material - View UsersMaterial Administration – Copy, Edit Subject & View History Details ?With this enhancement, administrators can now view all users who have any version of a material on their transcript from the Material Administration page. Administrators can also access the Transcript Details of an enrolled user's material.Renamed Legacy Forms to Training FormsRenamed Legacy Forms to Training Forms ?With this enhancement, the administration pages related to the training forms are renamed to more clearly indicate that they are specific to training forms. This includes page titles, field names and descriptions, email triggers, and permissions. This enhancement creates a consistent user experience for administrators when managing their new and existing training forms.Roster - Add Users Permission ConstraintsSession Roster Constraints and Sign-In Sheet Enhancement ?With this enhancement, Roster - Add Users permission can now be constrained by ILT Provider and User's ILT Provider. This constraint restricts the sessions to which an administrator or instructor is able to add users. For example, if an instructor is constrained to a particular provider, then the Add Users link is only available to the instructor on sessions that are associated with the constrained provider.Self-Registration Fields Enhancements XE "Self Registration" Self-Registration Fields Enhancements?With this enhancement, the following improvements are made to the Order step when configuring self-registration pages:Address and Prefix fields can now be includedData entered into the new address fields automatically populates the user recordAn option is added for custom fields to use the default and translated valuesSession Roster - Display Additional InformationSession Roster Constraints and Sign-In Sheet Enhancement ?With this enhancement, the Session Roster is enhanced to display the event name at the top of the page and the session start and end date in the session details.Session Roster - Sign-in Sheet EnhancementsSession Roster Constraints and Sign-In Sheet Enhancement This functionality is only available to organizations that are using the expanded sign-in sheet. To enable the expanded sign-in sheet, which includes this enhanced functionality, contact Global Product Support.With this enhancement, the printed sign-in sheet for a session is enhanced to display additional information and to display existing information more efficiently.Session Start Date Email Trigger - Manager NameSession Roster Constraints and Sign-In Sheet Enhancement ?With this enhancement, the Session Start Date email trigger is enhanced to support the RECIPIENT.MANAGER.FIRST.NAME and RECIPIENT.MANAGER.LAST.NAME tags. These tags enable administrators to include the name of the registered user's manager in the email.Time-out for Online CoursesTime-out for Online Courses ?With this enhancement, if a user is completing an online course and their login session is about to expire, the user is now notified. The user is also given the option to continue their login session. If the user does not choose to continue the login session, then the system ends the user's session. XE "Mobile" Mobile FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionMobile Redesign Auto-UpgradeMobile Redesign (New UX)?With the February '16 release, the mobile app is redesigned to provide users with a modern and vibrant interface. While there are no functionality or feature changes with this enhancement, the interface is designed to deliver a more consumerized experience to generate users.Mobile - Retire Support for Android 4.3 and iOS 7.0Mobile – Retire Support for Android 4.0 & iOS 7.0?With the February '16 release, support for older Android and iOS operating systems will be retired. The following operating systems will be supported following the February '16 release: Android – Only 4.4 and above will be supportedApple (iOS) – Only 8.0 and above will be supportedOnline Course External Links and DocumentsMobile – Online Course External Links and Documents?Android and iOS users are now able to access external links and documents from their online courses. When the link or document is closed, users are returned directly to the course without having to re-open the app.In addition, an option is added to Course Catalog to enable the header in mobile enabled online courses to be hidden. This allows users to experience the course in full-screen view.Performance FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionGoals RedesignGoals RedesignAutomatically enabled in Stage with UAT.Contact GPS to enable in Production and Pilot.Automatically upgraded across all environments with the April 2016 release.With this enhancement, the Goals functionality is redesigned. The entire end user experience and pages are redesigned for a stronger and more seamless process. Pages have been consolidated and pop-ups eliminated for a more efficient and effective goal creation, tracking, and management. Alignment options are displayed to reduce confusion and increase transparency. Tasks and Targets are created and grouped into a single section to more closely align with how they are created and tracked. The My Goals page displays all goals that relate to you with dynamic filtering options to display Manager, Division, and Company goals on the same page. Performance Reviews - Decline to SignPerformance Reviews - Decline to Sign? XE "Sign Off" With this enhancement, organizations can now provide reviewers with the option to decline to add their signature to the Sign Off section of a performance review. This allows the reviewer to indicate that they do not agree with the outcome of the performance review. When a reviewer declines to sign off on a performance review, this is clearly reflected throughout the performance review and in the printable performance review.Recruiting FeaturesFeature Name from Release NotesFeature Name from Release SummaryBy Request?DescriptionADP Workforce Now Integration for Recruiting and Onboarding XE "Onboarding" ?YesAn integration is now available for ADP WorkForce Now (WFN). With this integration, when an external candidate is hired and their User Record is created in Cornerstone, their user information is sent to WFN. Within WFN, the HR Administrator or manager can update the user's profile with additional information and advance that user as an employee.Global Recruiting LocalizationRecruiting Localization? XE "Job Requisition" For portals with multiple languages enabled, this enhancement enables a single job requisition to be created in multiple languages and allows administrators, hiring managers, recruiters, and applicants to view location-appropriate content in their preferred language. Prior to this enhancement, individual job requisitions had to be created for each language.Pre-Screening: Pop-Up and Retire Videos in QuestionsPre-screening Details At-a-Glance? XE "Applicant" With this enhancement, recruiters can quickly view an applicant's pre-screening questions, responses, and scores from a new pop-up that can be accessed from the Manage Applicants page. In addition, video files can no longer be uploaded when creating pre-screening questions.Print Onboarding Forms to PDFPrint Onboarding Forms to PDF?With this enhancement, clients can now render completed forms as a PDF so that the form can be printed or saved for future use outside the system. A Print to PDF XE "Universal Profile" option is added to the options drop-down in Universal Profile > Snapshot Documents. Prior to this enhancement, forms could only be printed using the print functionality on the browser.Recruiting Usability EnhancementsRecruiting Usability Enhancements? XE "Recruiting" With this enhancement, usability improvements are made to the Applicant Tracking System (ATS).New and Enhanced Permissions for February '16 ReleaseThe following permissions are new for the February '16 release:ProductPermission NamePermission DescriptionPermission Category XE "Learning" LearningEdit Online Course Providers XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to edit the Provider field for an online course via the Course Catalog. User must also have permission to update the Course Catalog. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Important: XE "User" Constraints are available for this permission (Provider and User's ILT Provider). However, these constraints are not enforced. Administrators with this permission can select any provider for an Online Course. Learning - AdministrationLearning XE "Material" Material Management - View Users XE "Transcript" Grants ability to view all users who have any version of the material on their transcript. Administrators with this permission can also access the transcript of enrolled users. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine for which materials the administrator is able to view users and which users the administrator is able to view on the Enrolled Employees page. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationLearningMaterial Version - Replace Only - Manage XE "Assign" Grants ability to assign a new version of a material to a user. The constraints on this permission determine to which users the administrator can assign a new version of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users. This is an administrator permission.This permission only applies to organizations that are using Simplified Versioning for materials.Learning - Administration XE "Link" LinkUsers - Edit Local System IDEnables administrator to modify the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationLinkUsers - View Local System IDEnables administrator to view the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationThe following existing permissions are enhanced for the February '16 release:ProductPermission NamePermission UpdatePermission CategoryCoreDocuments Preferences - Manage XE "Snapshot" This permission is renamed and is now titled Snapshot Folder Preferences - Manage. In addition, this permission can no longer be constrained. XE "Universal Profile" Universal ProfileLearningForms - ManageThis permission is renamed and is now titled Training Forms - Manage.Training Forms AdministrationLearningOrder Forms - ManageThis permission is renamed and is now titled Training Order Forms - Manage.Training Forms AdministrationLearningRoster - Add UsersThis permission can now be constrained by ILT Provider and User's ILT Provider.Learning - AdministrationLearning XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form AdministrationThis permission is renamed and is now titled Training Request Form - Manage.Training Forms AdministrationLearningMaterial Version - ManageThis permission is renamed and is now titled Material Version with Append - Manage.Learning - Administration XE "Performance" PerformanceGoals - Create XE "Relationship" This permission can now be constrained by Custom Relationship.PerformanceRelease Notes UpdatesChanges have been made on 12 February 2016, to the release notes for the February '16 release:CoreEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeReal Time Data WarehouseReal Time Data WarehouseAdded information about messaging that displays on the main Custom Reports page during the Real Time Data Warehouse enablement process.Changes have been made on 5 February 2016, to the release notes for the February '16 release:CoreEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of Change XE "Link" Link - New Local System ID FieldNew Local System ID FieldUpdated the title and Implementation section to clarify that this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations. Previously, this section indicated that this functionality is only for organizations using Link.Link - New Local System ID Field XE "User" User Record - Local System ID XE "Bio" Bio About PreferencesUpdated the introduction text to remove the reference to Link. This functionality is available for all organizations. XE "Organizational Unit" View OU and User Identifiers in Availability and Group Criteria XE "Group" View OU and User Identifiers in Availability and Group CriteriaUpdated the topic to indicate that the description text is changed from "All employees in OU: OU Name (OU ID)" to "All users in OU: OU Name (OU ID)" when setting availability. Note: This does not apply when setting group criteria. XE "Learning" LearningEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of Change XE "Learning Object" Learning Object Details Map View for ILT Preview ProgramSearch by GeolocationAdded an explanation and resolution for the error message "Map Search is currently not available." XE "Recruiting" RecruitingEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeGlobal Recruiting LocalizationCustom ReportsThis topic describes the inclusion of custom Recruiting reports in the Global Recruiting Localization enhancement.Global Recruiting Localization XE "Interview" Interview Guide ManagementThis topic describes the changes to the Interview Guide Management page as part of the Global Recruiting Localization enhancement.Global Recruiting LocalizationInterview Guide Management - Create GuideThis topic describes the changes to the Interview Guide Management - Create Guide page as part of the Global Recruiting Localization enhancement.?Changes have been made on 29 January 2016, to the release notes for the February '16 release:CoreEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of Change XE "Security" Customize Security on Snapshot Documents XE "Snapshot" Customize Security on Snapshot DocumentsUpdated the Implementation section to clarify that upon release, all existing folders are available and visible to all users. This matches previously existing functionality.LearningEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeLearning Object Details - Sessions TabLearning Object Details - Sessions TabAdded additional information to indicate that the number of seats that are available for each session is displayed on the Sessions tab. Also, added information to describe this functionality.Time-out for Online CoursesTime-out for Online CoursesUpdated the Implementation section to clarify that the timeout duration is based on an existing backend setting.RecruitingEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeGlobal Recruiting Localization XE "Job Requisition" Requisition Requests - Create Job RequisitionThis topic has been removed. Requisition Requests are not included in this enhancement. XE "Performance" PerformanceEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeGoals RedesignView Goals - My Goals XE "Team" View Goals - Team GoalsGoal - ManageUpdated the Goal Progress sections to clearly indicate when the Goal Progress Slider is available.?Changes have been made on 26 January 2016, to the release notes for the February '16 release:CoreEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeGlobal Search Behavior - People TabGlobal Search Behavior - People TabThis enhancement was added to the release notes.Portuguese Language Pack EnhancementsPortuguese Language Pack EnhancementsThis enhancement was added to the release notes.LearningEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of Change XE "Provider" Edit Provider for Online CoursesEdit Provider for Online Courses XE "Course Catalog" Course Catalog - GeneralUpdated the description of the Edit Online Course Providers permission to reflect that constraints are available for the permission, but the constraints are not enforced.?Changes have been made on 22 January 2016, to the release notes for the February '16 release:CoreEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeEllucian Banner Position IntegrationEllucian Banner Position IntegrationThis enhancement was added to the release notes.Web Services OptimizationWeb Services OptimizationModified the text to indicate that Web Service access is disabled for only those clients who have never accessed SOAP APIs. Previously, the release notes indicated that Web Service access is disabled for clients who have not accessed SOAP APIs within one year.LearningEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of ChangeDefect Fixes February 2016 ReleaseDefect Fixes February 2016 ReleaseModified the defect description to indicate that removed training had always appeared on the Records Report but had not been identified on the report as removed training. Content Content IntegrationThis enhancement was added to the release notes.Session Roster - Sign-in Sheet EnhancementsSession Roster - Sign-in Sheet EnhancementsModified the Implementation information to make it more clear that this functionality is only available to organizations that are using the expanded sign-in sheet. Also, provided enablement instructions for organizations that are using the non-expanded sign-in sheet.RecruitingEnhancement NameName of Updated TopicPurpose of Change XE "Onboarding" ADP Workforce Now Integration for Recruiting and OnboardingADP Workforce Now Integration for Recruiting and OnboardingThis enhancement was added to the release notes.February 19 Patch Release Functionality XE "Compensation" Compensation XE "Compensation Plan" Compensation Plan - Retain Display OptionsCompensation Plan - Retain Display Options XE "User" When viewing a compensation plan, the compensation manager is able to sort the columns that are displayed in ascending or descending order. The compensation manager can also configure display options such as user currency and the maximum number of users to display.Prior to this enhancement, when a compensation manager configures the display and sort options within a compensation plan tab and navigated to another tab within the compensation plan, the system default display options and sort orders would be applied to the page.With this enhancement, when a compensation manager configures the display and sort options within a compensation plan, the configured display options and sort orders are applied to all tabs as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan. This enables the compensation manager to navigate between tabs and view all data with the same display configuration without having to set the display configuration on each tab.This includes the following filters and sort options:Column sorting XE "Currency" Currency selectionOption to show ineligible employeesMaximum number of users displayedOption to show all commentsUse Cases XE "Base" John is a Compensation Planner, and he sorts the Base tab by Current Salary. XE "Bonus" When John navigates to the Bonus tab, John wants the system to maintain the sorting that was selected in the Base tab.This functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Compensation module. XE "Compensation Plan" Compensation Plan Tabs - Display Options XE "Compensation" With this enhancement, when a compensation manager configures the display and sort options within a compensation plan, the configured display options and sort orders are applied to all tabs as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan. This enables the compensation manager to navigate between tabs and view all data with the same display configuration without having to set the display configuration on each tab.The compensation manager's display options are saved as long as the compensation manager is navigating within the compensation plan.Column SortingIf a compensation manager sorts the columns within a compensation plan, then the sort order is maintained as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan.The following sort order priory is followed:Last sort available - If a column was sorted on a previous tab and the column is available on the current tab, then that column is used to sort the current tab.Last sort on page - If a column was sorted on a previous tab, but that column is not available on the current tab, then the last sort order that was used on the current tab is used.Default sort (Sort by Name) - If a previous sort is not available for the previous tab or the current tab, then the default sort order is used.Use Case 1 XE "Base" The manager sorts the Base tab by Merit Increase and navigates to the Bonus tab. XE "Bonus" The Bonus tab does not have a Merit Increase column, and no previous sort option has been applied to the Bonus tab, so the Bonus tab is sorted by Name, which is the default sort.The manager navigates to the Base tab, which is sorted by Merit Increase.Use Case 2The manager sorts the Base tab by Merit Increase and navigates to the Bonus tab.The Bonus tab does not have a Merit Increase column, and no previous sort option has been applied to the Bonus tab, so the Bonus tab is sorted by Name, which is the default sort. XE "User" The manager sorts the Bonus tab by User Salary and navigates to the Base tab. XE "Salary" The Base tab is sorted by User Salary.Use Case 3The manager sorts the Base tab by Merit Increase and navigates to the Bonus tab.The Bonus tab does not have a Merit Increase column, and no previous sort option has been applied to the Bonus tab, so the Bonus tab is sorted by Name, which is the default sort.The manager sorts the Bonus tab by Bonus and navigates to the Base tab.The Base tab does not have a Bonus column, so the Base tab is sorted by Merit Increase, which is the previously applied sort option. XE "Currency" Currency SelectionThe currency selections that are set on a compensation plan tab are maintained as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan.The following currency options are maintained:User CurrencyView: Amount or Percentage - Note: XE "Template" If the compensation manager has not changed this setting, then the default setting, as defined in each compensation template, is applied to each tab.Budget CurrencyShow Ineligible Employees SelectionThe Show Ineligible Employees selection that is set on a compensation plan tab is maintained as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan.If a default selection is set for a compensation template, then the following sort order priory is followed:If the compensation manager has modified the setting, then the compensation manager's selection is applied to all tabs.If the compensation manager has not modified the setting, then the default setting for each compensation template is used.Use CaseFor this use case, the compensation plan tabs have the following default configuration:Base Template - The Default View: Display Ineligible Employees option is unchecked.Bonus Template - The Default View: Display Ineligible Employees option is unchecked. XE "Equity" Equity Template - The Default View: Display Ineligible Employees option is checked.The following occurs:The manager views the Base Tab. By default, the Show Ineligible Employees option is unchecked.The manager checks the Show Ineligible Employees option.The manager navigates to the Bonus tab. The Show Ineligible Employees option is checked.The manager unchecks the Show Ineligible Employees option.The manager navigates to the Base tab. The Show Ineligible Employees option is unchecked.The manager navigates to the Equity tab. The Show Ineligible Employees option is unchecked.The manager navigates to the Summary tab. The Show Ineligible Employees option is unchecked.Show Number of Users SelectionThe Show selection that is set on a compensation plan tab is maintained as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan. If the selected value from the previous tab is not available on the current tab, then the default selection is applied.Use CaseFor this use case, the compensation plan tabs contain the following number of users:Base Tab - 60Bonus Tab - 30Equity Tab - 60Summary Tab - 60The following occurs:The manager views the Base Tab. 50 users are displayed on Page 1, and 10 users are displayed on Page 2.The manager selects 15 from the Show drop-down menu.The manager navigates to the Bonus tab. The Show drop-down menu is automatically set to 15. The manager selects Show All from the Show drop-down menu, and 30 users are displayed on Page 1.The manager navigates to the Equity tab. The Show drop-down menu is automatically set to 50.The manager navigates to the Bonus tab. The Show drop-down menu is automatically set to Show All.Show All Comments SelectionThe Show All Comments selection that is set on a compensation plan tab is maintained as the compensation manager navigates between tabs within the compensation plan. If the compensation manager has not changed this setting, then this option is unchecked on all tabs, which is the default behavior.Use CaseFor this use case, the compensation plan has a Base, Bonus, Equity, and Summary tab.The following occurs:The manager views the Base Tab. By default, the Show All Comments option is unchecked.The manager checks the Show All Comments option.The manager navigates to the Bonus tab. The Show All Comments option is checked.The manager unchecks the Show All Comments option.The manager navigates to the Base tab. The Show All Comments option is unchecked.The manager navigates to the Equity tab. The Show All Comments option is unchecked.The manager navigates to the Summary tab. The Show All Comments option is unchecked. XE "Compensation" Compensation Approval Email Digest XE "Approval" Compensation Approval Email Digest XE "Email" Prior to the introduction of email digests, individual emails were sent to recipients based on defined email triggers.With the July 2015 Release, email digests were introduced. XE "Group" An email digest is a scheduled email that is sent on a recurring basis. They are intended to group a user's notifications and reminders into a single email. Email digests are only sent to a user if there is active content for the user. XE "User" With this enhancement, a new email digest section is available for Compensation. This enhancement reduces the number of emails a user receives and lowers the chance that an email notification is missed. XE "Compensation Task" Compensation Task Due: Task Approver - XE "Connect" This dynamic section is intended to alert recipients that there is one or more new postings available in the recipient's Connect communities. This dynamic section can be configured to display the details of each new posting. If there has not been a new community posting that is available to the user since the last digest was delivered, then this section is not included in the email digest for the user. Use CasesAn administrator wants to create an email digest, which consolidates email notifications to end users. This reduces the amount of emails an end user receives, reducing the likelihood that the user overlooks an email.ConsiderationsEmail digests are separate from existing email triggers. Existing email triggers are not migrated to digest emails.Default language exception handling is not included in this release. For example, a digest email is created by an administrator in the English language. A French administrator adds a section in the French language. In this case, the email will contain text in English and French. In a future release, validation will be added to prevent this behavior.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically available in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using Compensation. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYEmail Digest Administration - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create, edit, view, and delete email digests. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User. The permission constraints determine which email digests the administrator can edit and delete. This is an administrator permission. XE "Performance" Performance - AdministrationEmail Digest Administration - ViewGrants ability to view email digests. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Performance - Administration XE "Email" Email Digest - Add SectionWhen adding a section to an email digest, the following email digest section is now available: XE "Compensation Task" Compensation Task Due: Task Approver - XE "Approval" This dynamic section is intended to alert recipients that there is one or more compensation task that requires their approval. This dynamic section can be configured to display the details of each compensation task that requires approval. If a user does not have any compensation tasks that require approval based on the section's reminder settings, then this section is not included in the email digest for the user. See Compensation Task Due: Task Approver Section PAGEREF _Ref-1418832687 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 50 for additional information.To add a section to an email digest, click the Add Section button in the Sections section.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYEmail Digest Administration - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create, edit, view, and delete email digests. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User. The permission constraints determine which email digests the administrator can edit and delete. This is an administrator permission. XE "Performance" Performance - Administration XE "Compensation Task" Compensation Task Due: Task Approver Section XE "Approval" This dynamic section is intended to alert recipients that there is one or more compensation task that requires their approval. This dynamic section can be configured to display the details of each compensation task that requires approval. If a user does not have any compensation tasks that require approval based on the section's reminder settings, then this section is not included in the email digest for the user. XE "Email" This email digest section is only sent for valid compensation tasks. Also, if an approver is skipped in the approval process or if an approver becomes inactive, then the email digest is not sent to that approver.This section is only available to organizations using compensation tasks.Send ReminderThis setting enables administrators to determine the threshold at which a compensation task that is due will be included in this email digest section. For example, if the email digest is configured to be sent weekly and the Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section is configured to send a reminder two weeks before the task approval is due, then each week the system determines which compensation tasks have an approval due date that is two weeks from the email digest period. Note: If the reminder is set to "0 days before," then the email digest will be sent on the day the approval is due.Because email digests can be sent at larger intervals (e.g., weekly or monthly), the email digest will likely not send the reminder exactly on the selected reminder date. XE "Selection" The reminder time units (i.e., days, weeks, or months) automatically match the frequency selection of the email digest (i.e., daily, weekly, or monthly). If the email digest is sent weekly, then the reminder setting is measured in weeks.A Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section will only send one reminder for a compensation task. For example, if the reminder is set for 3 weeks, then the section will send a reminder when the due date is three weeks away. In order to configure multiple reminders for the same compensation task, multiple instances of the Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section should be added to the email digest with different reminder settings.Section Send To OptionsWhen configuring the Send To option for a Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section, the following relation options are available:Task ApproverTask Approver Co-PlannerSection Specific TagsWhen configuring the section body for a Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section, the following tags are available: XE "User" {RECIPIENT.FIRST.NAME} - This displays the first name of the user who is receiving the email.{RECIPIENT.LAST.NAME} - This displays the last name of the user who is receiving the email.{LIST.BEGIN} - See the Repeater Tags section below.{LIST.END} - See the Repeater Tags section below. XE "Compensation Plan" {APPROVAL.STATUS} - This displays the current approval status of the compensation plan (i.e., approved or denied).{TASK.ASSIGNEE.FIRST.NAME} - This displays the first name of the person who is assigned the task.{TASK.ASSIGNEE.LAST.NAME} - This displays the last name of the person who is assigned the task.{COMPENSATION.APPROVER.FIRST.NAME} - This displays the first name of the person who is responsible for approving the compensation task.{COMPENSATION.APPROVER.LAST.NAME} - This displays the last name of the person who is responsible for approving the compensation task.{TASK.END.DATE}{TASK.TITLE}Repeater TagsAdministrators can use repeater tags to repeat information for each item in the email digest.Because non-standard sections are designed to display a digest of information in a single section, repeater tags must be placed before and after all of the content that should be repeated for each item in the digest. For a section that displays all of the items assigned to a user, then the repeater tags should be placed before and after the content and tags that describe each individual assigned item, such as title and due date. The following repeater tags should be placed before and after the content that should be repeated:{LIST.BEGIN} - This tag should be placed at the beginning of the content that should be repeated for each item.{LIST.END} - This tag should be placed at the end of the content that should be repeated for each item.Sample Section TextThe following is an example of how a Compensation Task Due: Task Approver section may be configured:Hello {RECIPIENT.FIRST.NAME} {RECIPIENT.LAST.NAME},The following compensation tasks require your approval:{LIST.BEGIN}{TASK.TITLE} has an end date of {TASK.END.DATE}. This compensation plan is assigned to {TASK.ASSIGNEE.FIRST.NAME} {TASK.ASSIGNEE.LAST.NAME} and it currently has an approval status of {APPROVAL.STATUS}.{LIST.END} XE "Connect" Connect XE "Community" Edit Community Membership TypeWith this enhancement, the community membership setting can be edited to enable switching membership from Auto-enrollment to Invitation, or from Invitation to Auto-enrollment. Prior to this enhancement, community membership was designated as Auto-enrollment or Invitation during the create community process, and this setting could not be changed after community creation.This enhancement gives community moderators the flexibility to adjust the membership settings for communities should the need arise, rather than requiring the community to be recreated in order to change the setting.Use CasesFred is the administrator for a community. The community he created can only be joined by accepting an invitation. After some internal discussion, it is determined that the community instead needs to be automatically accessible by all employees who meet the availability criteria. Fred edits the community membership setting from Invitation to Auto-enrollment, thereby automatically enrolling every employee who needs to access the community. XE "Organizational Unit" Harry is the administrator for a community. The community he created automatically enrolls every employee who meets the availability criteria. Management has decided that, because of the sensitivity of information posted within the community, all future members should not be automatically enrolled but should instead be extended an invitation based on organizational unit (OU) selection criteria.Edit Membership Option XE "Learning" When editing the Community or Learning Community pages, a new Membership option is added. This section allows users to change the membership setting.Auto-Enrollment to Invitation XE "Organizational Unit" When an administrator changes the membership setting from Auto-enrollment to Invitation, all users who are currently members of the community will remain. Any future community members will be required to join via invitation. For example, if the community moderator changes the membership setting from Auto-enrollment to Invitation and concurrently adds a new OU to the availability selection criteria, that new OU must join the community by accepting an invitation.Invitation to Auto-Enrollment XE "Selection" When an administrator changes the membership setting from Invitation to Auto-enrollment, all users who meet the availability selection criteria are automatically enrolled in the community. If the administrator concurrently adds another OU to the availability selection criteria, that OU is also automatically enrolled in the community. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Knowledge Bank" Edit Availability Knowledge Bank/CommunitiesGrants ability to configure the availability when editing communities or when creating or editing topics. This permission does not grant the ability to edit a community; users can only edit a community or topic if they have the Manage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration or if they are a moderator for the community or topic. When creating a topic, the constraints on this permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. If the user also has the Manage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration permission, then the constraints on that permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation.New ConnectManage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the New Knowledge Bank Administration page. Based on permission constraints, administrators with this permission can create and delete topics and subtopics. Administrators with this permission can view all communities, topics, sub-topics and postings, regardless of permission constraints. In addition, administrators can add a posting to the Course Catalog. When creating a topic, the constraints on this permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This permission is assigned to the default Administrator role by default.New ConnectEmbedded Images and Videos XE "Connect" With this enhancement, uploaded video files and images will be embedded in New Connect.Embedded Images XE "Live Feed" On the Live Feed, Team Feed, Task Details, and Posting Details pages, there already exists the ability to upload files. This behavior will continue to exist; however, if the file format is one of the supported image file types, then once the update, comment, or posting has been posted, the image will display at an enlarged size.Acceptable image file types are .bmp, .gif, .jpeg/.jpg, and .png.Pixel LimitationsDepending on where the image is being displayed, then it will display at different sizes while maintaining the original image's aspect ratio. If the original image's pixel width is under the maximum pixel width, then the image will display with its true pixel width and height.If the image's width exceeds 877 pixels, then an enlarged thumbnail image will be saved. The image's aspect ratio will be maintained, but will be resized to have a maximum width of 877 pixels. The following width limitations apply:image locationmaximum pixel width XE "Community" Community Posting877 XE "Posting" Community Posting Comment845Community Posting Threaded Comment802Task Details720 XE "Team" Team Overview Update683 XE "User" Feed User Update675Feed Activity Update675Note: .gif images that are larger than the page's parameters will be resized down and will lose any animation. The user can still download the original animated file.Embedded VideosOn the Live Feed, Team Feed, Task Details, and Posting Details pages, there already exists the ability to upload files. This behavior will continue to exist; however, if the file format is a supported video file type, then the video file will be queued for transcoding. Acceptable video types are .mp4, .mov, .flv, and .asf/.wmv.Once the transcoding process is complete, then the video file will display a small black video thumbnail, which indicates that the video can now be played inline. Clicking on this thumbnail will then display the video player and allow the user to play the video.When playing the video, the size of the video player will depend on the page where the video is being displayed. See the Pixel Limitations table above for sizing information.Featured or Trending Post Thumbnail ImagesIf a posting that has an embedded image or video file is Featured or Trending, then a thumbnail will display for that posting in the Featured and Trending widgets.Postings with embedded image files will use the top-most-position uploaded image file as the image used for the widget. Postings with embedded video files will use the top-most-position uploaded video file as the image used for the widget.However, if a posting includes both an uploaded image and a file, then the top-most eligible file will be used for the widget. This means that after creation, if a new eligible file replaces the top-most file, then the posting's thumbnail on these widgets will be updated to reflect this. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Knowledge Bank" View Knowledge Bank/Communities XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view the Knowledge Bank and Communities pages. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This permission is assigned to the default Administrator role by default.New ConnectView New ConnectGrants ability to view the new Connect pages, including Live Feed, All Teams, Team Overview, Team Feed, Team Tasks, Task Details, and Connections. This permission cannot be constrained.New Connect XE "Community" Remove Member or Self from Invitation CommunityWith this enhancement, users have the option to unjoin a community that they joined via invitation, and community moderators can remove users from a community that the users joined via invitation. This allows users to remove themselves from communities of which they no longer wish to be a member and provides moderators with greater capabilities in removing users.Use CasesA user needs to leave a certain community in which he is no longer active. He navigates to the homepage of the community and clicks the Options drop-down. He clicks the Leave Community XE "Selection" option, and then confirms his selection to leave the community in the confirmation pop-up. Upon confirmation, he is directed to the All Communities page.A user needs to leave a certain community in which he is no longer active. He navigates to the Members page of the community and sees a drop-down button on his profile tile. He clicks the button and chooses the Remove option. The user is removed from the community and is directed to the All Communities page.A community moderator needs to remove a user who should no longer be a member of a certain community. He navigates to the Members page of the community and sees a drop-down button on each member's profile tile. He clicks the drop-down button for the user he desires to remove and chooses the Remove option. He then sees a pop-up window prompting him to confirm his selection to remove the user from the community. Upon confirmation, he remains on the Members page of the community.Administrator - Remove UsersOn the Members page within a community, users can be removed from the community by clicking Remove from the options drop-down, which displays to the right of the user’s name. Clicking Remove opens a confirmation pop-up. Click Yes to confirm the removal. This closes the pop-up and removes the user from the community.User - Leave CommunityOn the Community homepage, a Leave Community option is added to the Options drop-down. When selected, a pop-up window prompts the user to confirm that they would like to leave the community. Click Yes in the pop-up. This removes the user, and the user is directed to the All Communities Page.User - Remove Self from CommunityOn the Members page within a community, users can remove themselves from a community by clicking the Remove option from the options drop-down. Clicking Remove opens a confirmation pop-up. Click Yes to confirm the removal. This closes the pop-up and removes the user from the community. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Knowledge Bank" Edit Availability Knowledge Bank/Communities XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to configure the availability when editing communities or when creating or editing topics. This permission does not grant the ability to edit a community; users can only edit a community or topic if they have the Manage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration or if they are a moderator for the community or topic. When creating a topic, the constraints on this permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. If the user also has the Manage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration permission, then the constraints on that permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. XE "Connect" New ConnectManage Knowledge Bank/Communities Administration XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the New Knowledge Bank Administration page. Based on permission constraints, administrators with this permission can create and delete topics and subtopics. Administrators with this permission can view all communities, topics, sub-topics and postings, regardless of permission constraints. In addition, administrators can add a posting to the Course Catalog. When creating a topic, the constraints on this permission are automatically applied to the topic's availability. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This permission is assigned to the default Administrator role by default.New Connect XE "Connect" SSO Compatibility with Connect Emails XE "Email" Email links in Connect-related emails will now link to postings for portals that use Single Sign On (SSO). When users click the link in the email, the user is taken directly to the linked posting.This enhancement applies to all Connect emails and email digests.CoreAJAX Control Toolkit Update XE "Library" With this enhancement, the Cornerstone system is now referencing an upgraded version of the AJAX Control Toolkit. The Cornerstone system uses the AJAX Control Toolkit third-party library for some of its controls such as the date picker control. With the optimization, users in some languages, such as Vietnamese, will see today's date within the date-picker control optimized for their culture. XE "Application" This enhancement broadly impacts date picker controls throughout the application. For clients intending to test this functionality, some of the more commonly used places include Create/Edit User, Events Calendar, and Review Applicants > Edit Requisition. Additionally, organizations using the date picker or calendar controls on custom pages should verify this functionality in their portals.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations. XE "Security" Customize Security on Snapshot Documents XE "Snapshot" Customize Security on Snapshot Documents XE "User" Prior to this enhancement, there was limited ability to customize access to folders within the Snapshot Documents functionality. If a user had permission to view their own or another user's Snapshot Documents page, then the user could view all folders and documents within the page. This prevented some organizations from fully utilizing the Snapshot Documents functionality. XE "Performance" With this enhancement, administrators can customize the security of each folder within Snapshot Documents. This enables administrators to determine for which users a folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page and which users have access to the folder for a specific set of users. With the ability to configure security for each folder individually, organizations can now utilize Snapshot Documents to securely store employee information including legal, job-related, and performance-related documents. XE "Universal Profile" In addition to the access control functionality enhancements, the user interface (UI) of the Folder Preferences page is improved to be consistent with the new look and feel of the system. Finally, the Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile is enhanced to allow users to search for folders and documents by title.Use CasesA large, multi-national corporation is transitioning from a hard copy filing system to Snapshot - Documents to store PDFs of employee Conflict of Interest and Non-Compete Agreements.Employees in all regions have forms that need to be stored, but different regions require different users to have visibility of the Non-Compete Agreements. In the United States, employees and managers should be able to view the contents of the agreements, while Human Resources (HR) should have full access to manage these documents. However, in Europe, both employees and HR should have full access to manage the forms. An administrator can create a Forms folder that will be available in Snapshot Documents. The administrator can configure specific visibility criteria that correlates to the appropriate region with availability to the folder.For this organization, Conflict of Interest forms are also collected, and this is only done in the United States. For these documents, only an employee's manager and HR should be able to access them, and the employee should not be able to see the documents on their own profile. An administrator can create a Compliance Documentation folder that will be available in Snapshot Documents, configure the access so that only their manager and HR department have access, and attach the Conflict of Interest documents.ConsiderationsThe Documents Preferences - Manage permission is renamed and is now titled Snapshot Folder Preferences - Manage. This permission cannot be constrained. ImplementationThis functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Snapshot Documents functionality within Universal Profile. For organizations that are not using Snapshot Documents, this functionality is disabled by default.To enable this functionality, contact Global Product Support. For more information about this functionality, contact your Client Success Manager.Upon release, all existing folders are available and visible to all users. This matches previously existing functionality.SecurityWith this release, the Documents Preferences - Manage permission is renamed and is now titled Snapshot Folder Preferences - Manage. In addition, this permission cannot be constrained. These changes will be reflected throughout Online Help with the February '16 release.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYSnapshot Folder Preferences - ManageEnables administrator to view the Folder Preferences Admin page and manage folder creation, access, and deletion for the Documents page within Universal Profile: Snapshot. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Universal ProfileThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Bio" Bio About - View XE "Transcript" Enables user to view the Bio page for users within their permission constraints. This permission must be enabled to view the Transcript page within Universal Profile. If a user does not have this permission and they click a person's name or user photo within the Universal Profile, then the Bio page will not open. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Direct Reports, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Universal ProfileDocuments - Delete XE "Relationship" Enables user to delete a file that has been uploaded to the Snapshot - Documents page. The constraints on this permission determine which documents the user can delete. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, Self and Direct Reports, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports.Universal ProfileSnapshot Documents - View XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - ViewEnables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfileFolder Preferences XE "Document" The Folder Preferences page enables administrators to create, edit, and remove the document folders that appear on the Snapshot Documents page. Administrators can also customize the availability and visibility of each folder within Snapshot Documents. This enables administrators to determine for which users a folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page and which users have access to the folder for a specific set of users. XE "User" With this enhancement, the user interface (UI) of the Folder Preferences page is improved to be consistent with the new look and feel of the system. The following changes have been made to the Folder Preferences page:The option to create a folder is changed from plus icon to a more visible Create Folder button.The Edit and Delete options are changed from icons in the Options column to an Options drop-down menu.The folder creation and edit process is now done on a new page. See Folder Preferences - Create/Edit Folder PAGEREF _Ref552843650 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 71 for additional information. XE "Snapshot" When creating and editing a folder, administrators now have the ability to configure the availability and visibility of each folder within Snapshot Documents.The Translate option is no longer available in the Options column. This option is only available when creating or editing a folder.In addition, the name of the navigation link within Admin Tools for the Folder Preferences page is updated from Documents to Folders.To access the Folder Preferences page, go to XE "Universal Profile" Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Universal Profile > Folders. The availability of this page is controlled by a backend setting.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYSnapshot Folder Preferences - ManageEnables administrator to view the Folder Preferences Admin page and manage folder creation, access, and deletion for the Documents page within Universal Profile: Snapshot. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Universal ProfileFolder Preferences - Create/Edit Folder XE "Snapshot" The Snapshot Documents page enables users and managers to upload and store documents. For example, a user can store project documents in their own Snapshot Documents page. Also, managers can store performance or compliance documents for a subordinate within the subordinate's Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile. When enabled, users can access the Snapshot Documents page by clicking the Documents widget on the Universal Profile Snapshot page. XE "Document" The Folder Preferences page enables administrators to create, edit, and remove the document folders that appear on the Snapshot Documents page. Administrators can also customize the availability and visibility of each folder within Snapshot Documents. This enables administrators to determine for which users a folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page and which users have access to the folder for a specific set of users. XE "User" Prior to this enhancement, there was limited ability to customize access to folders within the Snapshot Documents functionality. If a user had permission to view their own or another user's Snapshot Documents page, then the user could view all folders and documents within the page. This prevented some organizations from fully utilizing the Snapshot Documents functionality because they could not upload any sensitive documents. With this enhancement, administrators can customize the availability and visibility of each folder within Snapshot Documents. This enables administrators to determine for which users a folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page and which users have access to the folder for a specific set of users.Prior to this enhancement, the process of creating a Snapshot Documents folder was completed within a pop-up. With this enhancement, the process of creating a Snapshot Documents folder is now completed on a new page.Prior to this enhancement, the character limit for a folder name was 50. With this enhancement, the character limit for a folder name is now 1,000.To create a Snapshot Documents Folder, go to XE "Universal Profile" Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Universal Profile > Folders. Then, click the Create Folder button.To edit a Snapshot Documents folder, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Universal Profile > Folders. Then, select Edit from the Options drop-down for the appropriate folder.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYSnapshot Folder Preferences - ManageEnables administrator to view the Folder Preferences Admin page and manage folder creation, access, and deletion for the Documents page within Universal Profile: Snapshot. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Universal ProfileEnter the following information for the new folder:Folder Title - Enter the folder title up to 1,000 characters. This is required. The folder title may appear on the Snapshot Documents page when the folder is active. If multiple languages are enabled for your portal, click the Translate icon to translate the field into other available languages. Active - Select this option to make the folder active. When active, the folder may be available to users on the Snapshot Documents page. When the folder is inactive, it is never available to users on the Snapshot Documents page.Folder PreferencesThis section enables administrators to configure which users have the folder on their Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile and which users can access the folder. Administrators can also configure what level of access the selected users have for the folder.Folder Preferences Sections XE "Performance" Folder Preferences for a folder can be configured using multiple segments, which enables administrators to configure different visibility settings and different levels of access depending on whose folder is being accessed. For example, if you are creating a Performance Review folder that is enabled for all sales representatives, then this folder may be owned by the Performance Manager role. However, if you are creating a Performance Review folder that is enabled for the Executive team, then this folder may be owned only by the CEO since the data may be more sensitive.Sections can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the section's arrow icon. This enables administrators to manage how much information is displayed on the page.Add SectionTo add an additional Folder Preferences section, click the Add Section button. A new section is added to the bottom of the page. When a new section is added, the section header displays "New Criteria." Once the folder is saved, the section header displays the section's availability settings. Displaying a relevant section header enables administrators to quickly identify a section when editing the section.Remove SectionTo remove a Folder Preferences section, click the Remove icon in the upper-right corner of the section. A confirmation pop-up opens to confirm the section removal.Removing a section removes all availability and visibility within the section. Users who are affected by the change in availability and visibility will notice the change as soon as the folder is saved. When availability and visibility are removed, the documents that are stored within the folder are not affected.AvailabilityThe Availability settings determine for which users the folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile. If a folder is available for a user, this does not mean that the folder is visible to the user. The ability to view and upload documents to the folder is configured in the Visibility settings. XE "Organizational Unit" The Availability settings determine for which users the folder is available on their Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile. If a folder is available for an organizational unit (OU), this means that documents can be stored on the Snapshot Documents page of users within the selected OU. Availability, in this instance, does not dictate who can access the folder; the ability to access the folder, for the set of users defined in the Availability section, is defined in the Visibility section. For more clarity, see the Use Case section below.To add users to the folder's availability, select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu. Then, click the Select icon XE "Organizational Unit" to select the appropriate organizational unit (OU), group, or user. Alternatively, administrators can also enter the OU, group, or user name in the field.Select the Include Subordinates option to include any subordinate OUs, groups, or users in the availability. XE "Selection" To remove a selection from the Availability section, click the Remove icon to the left of the selection.VisibilityThe Visibility settings determine which users have access to the folder for the set of users who are selected in the Availability section. These settings also determine what level of access the selected users have for the folder. Note: The visibility settings are always enforced, even if a link to a folder or document is shared with another user. XE "Relationship" Visibility can be configured by employee relationship (e.g., Manager, Indirect Manager, Subordinates) or OU criteria (i.e., OU, group, or user). From the drop-down menu, select whether you are selecting an employee relationship or an OU, group, or user.When selecting an employee relationship, click the Select icon to select the appropriate relationship. Alternatively, administrators can also enter the relationship name in the field.When selecting an OU, group, or user, select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu. Then, click the Select icon to select the appropriate OU, group, or user. Alternatively, administrators can also enter the OU, group, or user name in the field.Select the Include Subordinates option to include any subordinate OUs, groups, or users in the visibility. XE "Action" In the Action Group column, select which level of access the selected OU, group, or user should have for the folder. The following options are available:Viewer - Users in this group can view all files within the folder.Contributor - Users in this group can view all files within the folder, upload files to the folder, and remove any files that they have uploaded to the folder.Owner - Users in this group can view all files within the folder, upload files to the folder, and remove any files within the folder.To remove a selection from the Visibility section, click the Remove icon to the left of the selection.Availability and Visibility Use CaseA folder is created for storing PDF performance reviews. All users participate in performance reviews, and only an employee's manager and HR should be able to access this content.The Availability can be set to All Employees.The HR Manager employee relationship is added to the Visibility as an Owner so that the HR managers can upload and delete performance review documents.The Manager employee relationship is added to the Visibility as a Contributor so that managers can upload performance review documents and delete any documents that they have uploaded.Save/CancelClick Save to save the folder configuration, or click Cancel to discard any unsaved changes to the folder.When a new section is added, the section header displays "New Criteria." Once the folder is saved, the section header displays the section's availability settings. Displaying a relevant section header enables administrators to quickly identify a section when editing the section. XE "Universal Profile" Universal Profile - Snapshot - Documents Widget XE "Snapshot" With this enhancement, administrators can configure to which users each folder is visible. As a result, if a folder is not visible to a user then the documents within that folder are also not visible. The Documents widget on the Snapshot page accurately indicates the number of documents that are visible to the user who is viewing the page.To access the Snapshot page, go to Home > Universal Profile. Then, click the Snapshot tab. Note: The location of this link is configurable by your system administrator. XE "Bio" To access another user's Universal Profile - Bio page, click the user's photograph from any page within Universal Profile or from Global Search. From there, you can access the user's Snapshot page by clicking the Snapshot tab. Users can view the Snapshot page of other users who are within their permission to view the Snapshot page.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYBio About - View XE "Transcript" Enables user to view the Bio page for users within their permission constraints. This permission must be enabled to view the Transcript page within Universal Profile. If a user does not have this permission and they click a person's name or user photo within the Universal Profile, then the Bio page will not open. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Direct Reports, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Universal ProfileSnapshot Documents - View XE "Relationship" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - View XE "Organizational Unit" Enables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal Profile XE "Snapshot" Snapshot Documents XE "Performance" The Snapshot Documents page enables users and managers to upload and store documents. For example, a user can store project documents in their own Snapshot Documents page. Also, managers can store performance or compliance documents for a subordinate within the subordinate's Snapshot Documents page within Universal Profile. When enabled, users can access the Snapshot Documents page by clicking the Documents widget on the Universal Profile Snapshot page.Prior to this enhancement, folders within the Snapshot Documents page had limited access control preferences. That is, if a user could view the Snapshot Documents page, then they could view all of the folders on the page and all of the documents within each folder. With this enhancement, administrators can set the availability and visibility of a folder via Folder Preferences. As a result, a folder is only accessible to a user on the Snapshot Documents page if the folder is available to the user whose Snapshot Documents page is being viewed and if the user who is viewing the page is within the visibility settings for the folder. In addition, the actions that are available to the user who is viewing the folder is determined by the user's access level.A Search field is added to the Snapshot Documents page. This field enables users to search for documents and folders by title. XE "Universal Profile" To access the Documents page, click the Documents widget on the Universal Profile - Snapshot page.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Bio" Bio About - View XE "Transcript" Enables user to view the Bio page for users within their permission constraints. This permission must be enabled to view the Transcript page within Universal Profile. If a user does not have this permission and they click a person's name or user photo within the Universal Profile, then the Bio page will not open. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Direct Reports, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Universal ProfileDocuments - Delete XE "Relationship" Enables user to delete a file that has been uploaded to the Snapshot - Documents page. The constraints on this permission determine which documents the user can delete. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, Self and Direct Reports, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports.Universal ProfileSnapshot Documents - View XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - ViewEnables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfileSearch Documents and FoldersTo search for a document or folder, enter the document or folder title in the Search field, and either press the [Enter] key or click the magnifying glass icon . Matching folders are displayed before documents, and the newest folders and documents are displayed first. Note: If multiple languages are enabled for the portal, then a folder is only included in the search results if the folder title matches the search query for the user's configured language. The folder is also included if a non-default translation matches the search query and a translation is not defined for the user's configured language.To clear a search and display all available folders, delete the text within the Search field, and either press the [Enter] key or click the magnifying glass icon .To open a folder to view the Folder Details page, click the folder title.The following actions may be available in the Actions drop-down for documents in the search results:Open - Select this option to open the document. This action can also be performed by clicking the document title.Delete - Select this option to delete the document. This option is only available if the user has permission to delete documents and is either an Owner or a Contributor for the folder in which the document exists.If a user is designated as a Contributor for the document's folder, then the user can only delete the document if they added the document to the folder.Note: Only uploaded documents can be deleted. Forms cannot be deleted.Search Results ExampleA user with a configured language of English (US) enters "pro" in the Search field and presses [Enter]. The following results are displayed:“Project Management” folder - Default translation is English (US), and no other translations are defined.“My Projects” folder - Default translation is English (US), and Spanish (Latin America) and French (France) translations are defined. XE "Program" “Program Management” folder - An English (US) translation is defined for the folder, and the default language is French (France).“Vision du produit” - The default translation is French (France), and no English (US) translation is defined.The following results are not returned:“Software Engineer” folder - The English (US) translation does not match the search criteria. The default translation (“Programador”) matches the search criteria, but it is Spanish, which is not the user's configured language. XE "Snapshot" Snapshot Documents - Folder Details XE "User" With this enhancement, the actions that are available to the user who is viewing a folder is determined by the user's access level, which is configured by the administrator via Folder Preferences. Each folder can have its own unique access configuration.The following access levels are available XE "Group" Viewer - Users in this group can view all files within the folder.Contributor - Users in this group can view all files within the folder, upload files to the folder, and remove any files that they have uploaded to the folder.Owner - Users in this group can view all files within the folder, upload files to the folder, and remove any files within the folder. XE "Universal Profile" To access the Folder Details page, click the Documents widget on the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. Then, click a folder title.PermissionsThe availability of this functionality is controlled by backend settings.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Bio" Bio About - View XE "Transcript" Enables user to view the Bio page for users within their permission constraints. This permission must be enabled to view the Transcript page within Universal Profile. If a user does not have this permission and they click a person's name or user photo within the Universal Profile, then the Bio page will not open. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Direct Reports, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Universal ProfileDocuments - Delete XE "Relationship" Enables user to delete a file that has been uploaded to the Snapshot - Documents page. The constraints on this permission determine which documents the user can delete. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, Self and Direct Reports, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports.Universal ProfileSnapshot Documents - View XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - ViewEnables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfileAdd FileThe Add File button in the upper-right corner of the Folder Details page is only available for users who are designated as Contributors or Owners for the folder. This button is not available for users who are designated as Viewers for the folder.Open FileThe Open option in the Actions drop-down for a file is available for all users who have access to the folder. This includes user who are designated as Viewers, Contributors, or Owners for the folder.Delete FileIf a user is designated as an Owner for the folder and has permission to delete documents, then the Delete option in the Actions drop-down is available for all files in the folder. Users must have the Documents - Delete permission, and they can only delete documents that were uploaded by users who are within the constraints on this permission.If a user is designated as a Contributor for the folder and has permission to delete documents, then the Delete option in the Actions drop-down is available for all files that the user added to the folder. The Contributor cannot delete any files that were added by another user. If multiple people are adding files to a folder, then it is possible that the user can delete some files within the folder but not others.If a user is designated as a Viewer for the folder and has permission to delete documents, then the Delete option is not available for any files within the folder.Note: Forms that are stored in a folder cannot be deleted. XE "Data Load Wizard" Data Load Wizard - User Load Support for Hierarchy Relationships in the Same File XE "User" Prior to this enhancement, when attempting to create a new user via the Data Load Wizard, and that user is the manager, approver, or another relationship for another user in the same file, the data file could not be loaded. This is because the user who was listed as a manager, approver, or another relationship for another user in the file was not recognized because they had not yet been created in the system. Because of this, administrators had to first create the new user in one data load, and then load the users with the associated relationships in a separate data load. This increased the amount of time administrators needed to load user data.With this enhancement, the Data Load Wizard is updated to more seamlessly support loading users and their associated hierarchies (direct reports, approvers, etc.) within the same file. For example, administrators can now specify a manager for a new user even if the manager and the user are both being added to the system for the first time. This greatly reduces the work and rework needed to load a new user along with a new manager or direct report.Use CasesSam Smith is a new user and has not yet been added to the system.James Jones is Sam's manager, and James is also a new user who has not yet been added to the system. XE "Relationship" Pam Taylor has a custom relationship with Sam as his Matrix Manager. She is also a new user who has not yet been added to the system.In the data load, user record information is provided for Sam Smith, James Jones, and Pam Taylor. Each user is listed as a separate user record.For Sam Smith, James and Pam are referenced in his user record as his Manager and Matrix Manager.The data is successfully loaded even though the manager and matrix manager listed for Sam Smith are new users and had not yet been added to the system at the time of the data load.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Data Load Wizard.In order to purchase the Data Load Wizard, please contact Sales or your Client Executive. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYData Load Wizard - UsersEnables administrator to load users. This permission also enables administrators to track data loads and manage data load templates. This is an administrator permission.Data Load WizardDisplay Inherited Permissions on Reports XE "Security" As part of current functionality for security roles, any permission that is added to a child role is also inherited by the parent role. With this enhancement, an Inherited Permission column is added to the Security Role Report output. This column indicates whether or not a permission has been inherited from a child role. The column displays "Yes" if the permission has been inherited by the parent role from a child role, and "No" if the permission has not been inherited from a child role.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Role" Security Role Report XE "User" Grants access to view the User Roles, Permission and Constraints Report, which displays user level information about roles, permissions and constraints. This permission cannot be constrained.Reports - SystemEllucian Banner Position Integration XE "Organizational Unit" An inbound data feed is now available to import data from Ellucian's Banner Position Description system into Cornerstone. The standard integration supports an inbound feed from Ellucian to Cornerstone, which contains the following Position OU data: Description, Responsibilities, Attributes (Education, Skills, Certifications, Exams).This enhancement enables organizations to synchronize Position OU data between Ellucian's Banner Position Description system and Cornerstone.Implementation XE "Template" In order to utilize this functionality, organizations need to purchase Banner Position Description from Ellucian, and then contact Cornerstone to configure the integration. With this integration, organizations utilize the standard Cornerstone-Ellucian Position Description Inbound Data Feed template for all data types.In order to purchase an Inbound Data Feed, please contact Sales or your Client Executive.Enhanced Web Service Definition Language (WSDL)In order to support creating organizational units (OUs) for multiple languages, the SetOUlocal parameters are now included within the Web Service Definition Language (WSDL).ImplementationThis Web Service is automatically available to all portals that have purchased it.If you have purchased Web Services usage, but need access to this specific one, please contact CSOD via a GPS case to enable.If you have not purchased Web Services at all, please contact Sales or Client Executive to purchase.Global Search Behavior - People TabPrior to this enhancement, the Global Search page automatically displayed the first 400 users when a user navigated to the People tab within Global Search.With this enhancement, the People tab of the Global Search page no longer displays any users until at least one search criterion is defined.When a user clicks the People tab, no users are displayed.When a user clicks the Search button on the Global Search page when the People tab is selected and no criteria are specified, no users are displayed. XE "Performance" This enhancement is implemented in order to improve the performance of the Global Search page.ConsiderationsAll other tabs within Global Search are not impacted by this enhancement and do not follow this behavior. However, this behavior is scheduled to be applied to all tabs in a future release.ImplementationThis functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Global Search for People. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGlobal Search - People XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to search for people via Global Search. If this permission is constrained to a specific OU, then that constraint is automatically applied within Global Search, including search filters and search results. This is an end user permission. The availability of this permission is controlled by a backend setting.CoreInsights Compliance Control XE "Dashboard" Online Help for the Compliance Control Insight is now available. The Compliance Control dashboard helps organizations understand their risk for not meeting compliance requirements for training completion. The dashboard displays widgets that show the number of employees who are at risk for not completing training on time and which trainings are the most at risk (i.e., the trainings that are the most "at risk" courses by number of employees that are at risk for not completing them). The primary risk factors also display, as well as a breakdown of the top at-risk trainings by organizational unit.For help content, see the Insights > Compliance Control section in Online Help. XE "Link" Link - Data Load Wizard User Load XE "Data Load Wizard" Prior to this enhancement, when both Link and Data Load Wizard (DLW) were in use, administrators were required to provide a User ID when creating new users in the system. Also, the User ID was set for the user and could not be modified. This was an issue for organizations that rely on the Cornerstone system to set the User ID for new users. XE "Data Load Wizard" With this enhancement, when both Link and Data Load Wizard (DLW) are in use, the DLW User Data Load and User Data Feed are updated to accept user information without a User ID. When user data is provided without a User ID, the DLW creates a new user record for the user, and the system automatically creates a User ID for the user.In addition, the DLW now supports adding and updating the Local System ID standard field. This field enables organizations to capture an identifier from a local system. However, this value does not need to be unique, and it is not used to validate whether users exist in the system. This field would typically be used when Cornerstone is generating User IDs for users and the organization wants to store the identifier from their local Human Resources (HR) or Payroll system in the Cornerstone system. The character limit is 100. This field is optional. The availability of this field is controlled by a backend setting.For organizations that have enabled the User ID field within the system, the following scenarios may occur:When user data is provided with a User ID, then the system checks to see if the user exists in the system.If the user already exists in the system, then the DLW updates the user record with the loaded information.If the user does not exist in the system, then the DLW creates a new user record using the specified User ID.When user data is provided without a User ID, the DLW creates a new user record for the user. The system automatically creates a User ID for the user. XE "Template" If the data mapping template does not include the User ID field or if the User ID field is not mapped to the template, then the data load can only be used to create new users.For organizations that have disabled the User ID field within the system, the following scenarios may occur:When user data is provided with a Username, then the system checks to see if the user exists in the system.If the user already exists in the system, then the DLW updates the user record with the loaded information.If the user does not exists in the system, then the DLW creates a new user record using the specified Username.When a user is provided without a Username, the DLW creates a new user record for the user. The system automatically creates a Username for the user.All other data validations are not impacted by this enhancement.Use CasesAcme Corp. is a global company with multiple locations and a decentralized Human Resources department. They use the Cornerstone system as their system of record for users. Multiple administrators can load users into the system using the DLW. Administrators do not provide a User ID for users when they are loading users into the system. The DLW creates new user records for each user, and the system generates a User ID for each user.ConsiderationsThis functionality only applies to organizations using Link.Because the DLW does not require a User ID, it is possible to create two user records for the same user. For example, if an administrator provides two records without User IDs and both records are for the same user, then the system will create two user records for the user with two different User IDs.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using Link and the Data Load Wizard.In order to purchase Link or the Data Load Wizard, please contact Sales or your Client Executive. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYData Load Wizard - UsersEnables administrator to load users. This permission also enables administrators to track data loads and manage data load templates. This is an administrator permission.Data Load Wizard XE "Link" Link - Use Recruiting and Effective Dating Together XE "Recruiting" Prior to this enhancement, organizations could not enable both Recruiting and Effective Dating for Link in the same portal. XE "Effective Dating" With this enhancement, both Recruiting and Effective Dating for Link can be used within the same portal.ImplementationUpon release, Link can be enabled for all organizations using Link. The backend support for this is automatically enabled for all organizations.In order to purchase Link, please contact Sales or your Client Executive.New Local System ID FieldNew Local System ID FieldPrior to this enhancement, only the Username and User ID fields were available for an organization to capture identifiers for users. This posed a challenge to organizations that wanted to have Cornerstone generate User IDs for their employees and also store system IDs from a local Human Resources (HR) or Payroll system.With this enhancement, a new Local System ID field is now available, which enables organizations to store the identifier that is generated by Cornerstone in the User ID field and store the ID from a local HR or Payroll system in the Local System ID field. XE "Bio" In addition, the User ID can now be configured to display on the Contact Info panel of the Bio About page.Considerations XE "Data Load Wizard" The Local System ID field is supported by the Data Load Wizard, but it is not yet available in reporting.For organizations using data feeds, these data feeds must be enhanced in order to write data to this field.Implementation XE "Link" Upon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations, including organizations using Link.For organizations using a data feed, contact Sales, your Client Executive, or your Client Success Manager (CSM).Upon release, the Users - Edit Local System ID and Users - View Local System ID permissions are automatically assigned to the following default system roles:Cornerstone AdministratorService Tech AdminSystem Administrator XE "Security" SecurityThe following new permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYUsers - Edit Local System IDEnables administrator to modify the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationUsers - View Local System IDEnables administrator to view the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYUsers - Edit Core InformationGrants ability to add users and edit core information on a user record, including first name, last name, username, assigned OUs, and custom relationships. This permission works in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - View Core and Edit Custom Fields permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationUsers - ViewGrants ability to search for and view summary information about users in the portal, via the Admin/Users screen. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and Users. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration XE "User" User Record - Local System IDA new Local System ID field is now available to the right of the User ID field on the User Record page.To add a new user record, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Users. Then, click the Add User link.To edit a user record, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Users. Search for the appropriate user. Then, click the user's name in the Search Results table.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYUsers - Edit Core InformationGrants ability to add users and edit core information on a user record, including first name, last name, username, assigned OUs, and custom relationships. This permission works in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - View Core and Edit Custom Fields permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationUsers - Edit Local System IDEnables administrator to modify the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationUsers - ViewGrants ability to search for and view summary information about users in the portal, via the Admin/Users screen. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and Users. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationUsers - View Local System IDEnables administrator to view the Local System ID for a user via the admin/users screen. This permission only works when used in conjunction with the Users - View and Users - Edit permissions. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationThis field enables organizations to capture an identifier from a local system. This field would typically be used when Cornerstone is generating User IDs for users and the organization wants to store the identifier from their local Human Resources (HR) or Payroll system in the Cornerstone system. This field is optional. Administrators must have permission to view or manage the Local System ID.This field is audited, but it cannot be effective dated. XE "Bio" Bio About Preferences XE "User" Bio About Preferences is enhanced to enable organizations to display the User ID field.In the Contact Info Panel XE "Universal Profile" section of Bio About Preferences, a User ID option is now available. When this field is enabled, the User ID field is displayed on the Bio About page within Universal Profile. This enables users to easily reference their User ID.To access the Bio About Preferences page, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Universal Profile > Bio About.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYBio About Preferences - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Enables administrator to access and edit the Bio About Preferences page. The availability of this permission is controlled by a backend setting. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Universal Profile XE "Bio" Bio About XE "User" Depending on the configuration of the Bio About Preferences, a User ID field may now be displayed in the Contact Info Panel section of the Bio About page. This enables users to easily reference their User ID.To access the Bio - About page, go to XE "Universal Profile" Home > Universal Profile. Click the Bio tab, and then click the About subtab.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYBio About - View XE "Transcript" Enables user to view the Bio page for users within their permission constraints. This permission must be enabled to view the Transcript page within Universal Profile. If a user does not have this permission and they click a person's name or user photo within the Universal Profile, then the Bio page will not open. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Direct Reports, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Universal Profile XE "Organizational Unit" Organizational Unit (OU) LocalizationOrganizational Unit Localization Overview XE "Organizational Unit" Prior to this enhancement, organizations could not localize the Organizational Unit (OU) structure. This meant that organizations using multiple languages have, for the most part, deployed Cornerstone with an OU hierarchy in one of three ways:One language for the entire OU hierarchyMultiple languages, concatenated in the same field, for the OU hierarchySeparate OU structures for each supported languageWith all of these deployment structures, the OU names that were displayed to users did not respect the user's preferred language.With this enhancement, administrators are now able to add localized translations for all standard and custom OUs within the portal. This enables organizations to maintain a single OU structure globally while ensuring that users always see the appropriate value based on their preferred language. As a result, organizations are able to more easily build, maintain, and support their organizational structure within the system.Enablement ConsiderationsFor organizations that have implemented either of the first two methods listed above, requesting to enable the OU Localization functionality may improve the Cornerstone portal, and this enablement can be done without a significant impact. For organizations that have implemented the third method listed above, where separate OU structures are defined for separate languages, this requires migration in order to establish a single OU structure for all languages. For these organizations, Cornerstone recommends deferring enablement until productized migration scripts are available to assist with consolidating the OU hierarchy.Additional DetailsFor OUs, the Name and Description fields are eligible for translation. In addition, any OU custom fields that are short text box or scrolling text box are also eligible for translation. Specifically for Self-registration Groups, Description is not supported, so only the Name field is eligible for translation.Because OU names are displayed throughout the system, all areas of the system are impacted by this enhancement. Any page that displays the name or description of an OU can now display a localized translation of the OU name or description.Custom reports are also updated to display the localized values for OU names in the User/OU Filters tab, the Sharing tab, and the report outputs. Standard reports, however, will continue to display the default translation of the OU. Supporting OU Localization in standard reports is scheduled for a future release.The following OU types are eligible for translation:Standard OUs:DivisionPositionGradeCost CenterLocationGroupSelf-registration GroupCustom OUsUse Cases XE "Action" An organization has an office in Montreal, Canada, where both English and French speaking employees often hold the same position and at times change their preferred language. The organization needs to be able to maintain a single OU for each position (e.g., Position: Project Manager) with translations for English and French. This allows the user to update their preferred language and see the change reflected anywhere the OU name or description is displayed without any action by an administrator. This also helps to ensure compliance with local regulations related to language preference.ConsiderationsWhen creating or editing an OU, the ID value must be unique for all OUs. As a result, this field does not support localization.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is disabled for existing portals.Because OUs are the underlying foundation of data structures, there are significant considerations for existing clients who are thinking about using this feature. Please reach out to your Client Success Manager (CSM) prior to requesting to use this functionality in order to determine if this is right for you. Upon enabling this functionality, all existing OUs and groups only have a translation for the OU or group's default language. Administrators must edit all existing OUs and groups to add localized translations in order to have the OUs and groups display in each user's preferred language.For OUs that are created after OU Localization is enabled, the OU's default language is set to the preferred language of the administrator who creates the OU. This is set at the time the OU is created.For OUs that are created before OU Localization is enabled, the OU's default language is set to the default language of the portal's top-level OU. This is typically the Corporate Language, and it is set when OU Localization is enabled. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGrades - ViewGrants ability to view the Grade Org Unit throughout the system, such as in availability drop down selectors, when editing users, etc. Those without this permission do not see the Grade OU on any screen. This is primarily an administrator permission, although organizational policy should determine whether the Grade OU should be visible to end users on reporting screens, etc.Core AdministrationOU Group - Manage XE "Provider" Grants ability to create, copy, and update/edit custom groups of users without allowing ability to manage org units. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationOU Group - UpdateGrants access to edit existing custom groups of users. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationOU Group - ViewGrants access to view existing custom groups. This permission can be constrained by OU. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationOU Hierarchy - ManageGrants ability to create and update/edit organizational units and custom groups. This permission grants access to all OU types, both standard and custom. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration XE "User" Localization End User Experience XE "Organizational Unit" When an administrator or user is viewing any page in the system that includes an organizational unit (OU) name or description, the name or description should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name or description is displayed in the OU's default language. XE "Application" The localization of OUs and their display throughout the application follows this logic. To assist organizations with the understanding of the functionality and where the impacts of enabling OU Localization will be seen, many of the places OUs are displayed throughout the application are described in these release notes.Searching by OU XE "Group" When searching for an OU or group, an OU or group is only included in the search results if the OU or group name matches the search query for the user's preferred language. If a translation is not defined for the user's preferred language, the OU or group is included in the search results if the default translation matches the search query.Search Results ExampleA user with a preferred language of English (US) is searching for positions by name. The user enters "pro" in the Search field and presses [Enter]. The following results are displayed:“Junior Project Analyst” - Default translation is English (US), and no other translations are defined.“Associate Project Analyst” - Default translation is English (US), and Spanish (Latin America) and French (France) translations are defined.“Project Manager” - An English (US) translation is defined, and the default language is French (France).“Chef de projet senior” - The default translation is French (France), and no English (US) translation is defined.The following results are not returned:“Software Engineer” - The English (US) translation does not match the search criteria. The default translation (“Programador”) matches the search criteria, but it is Spanish, which is not the user's configured language."Analyste adjointe de projet" - This is the French (France) translation for the "Associate Project Analyst" OU. The French translation is not returned because the English (US) translation also matches the search query, and English (US) is the user's preferred language. XE "Organizational Unit" Organizational Unit - Create/Edit XE "Organizational Unit" If Organizational Unit (OU) Localization is enabled for a portal, then administrators can now add localized translations for the following fields when creating or editing a standard or custom OU:Name - A translation for the OU's default language is required for this field.DescriptionOU Custom Fields - Any short text box or scrolling text box OU custom fields that are available can be localized.The Translate icon is available to the right of the above mentioned fields. When the Translate icon is clicked, the following Standard Text Translation pop-up opens. This allows the administrator to provide translations for any of the languages that are currently enabled for the portal. When translations are saved, the translation for the default language is displayed on the Create/Edit OU page. If a translation is not available for the default language, then the field appears blank.The ID value must be unique for all OUs. As a result, this field does not support localization.In the Details section, the Default Language XE "User" field displays the default language for the OU. This enables administrators to know which translation will be displayed to a user if a translation is not defined for the user's preferred language. The Default Language value cannot be modified.For OUs that are created after OU Localization is enabled, the OU's default language is set to the preferred language of the administrator who creates the OU. This is set at the time the OU is created.For OUs that are created before OU Localization is enabled, the OU's default language is set to the default language of the portal's top-level OU. This is typically the Corporate Language, and it is set when OU Localization is enabled. To create an OU, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Organizational Units. Then, click the Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGrades - ViewGrants ability to view the Grade Org Unit throughout the system, such as in availability drop down selectors, when editing users, etc. Those without this permission do not see the Grade OU on any screen. This is primarily an administrator permission, although organizational policy should determine whether the Grade OU should be visible to end users on reporting screens, etc.Core AdministrationOU Hierarchy - ManageGrants ability to create and update/edit organizational units and custom groups. This permission grants access to all OU types, both standard and custom. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration XE "Group" Self-registration Group - Create XE "Organizational Unit" If Organizational Unit (OU) Localization is enabled for a portal, then administrators can now add localized translations for the following field when creating or editing a self-registration group:Name XE "Organizational Unit" - A translation for the OU's default language is required for this field.The Translate icon is available to the right of the above mentioned field. When the Translate icon is clicked, the following Standard Text Translation pop-up opens. This allows the administrator to provide translations for any of the languages that are currently enabled for the portal.The Default Language XE "User" field displays the default language for the group. This enables administrators to know which translation will be displayed to a user if a translation is not defined for the user's preferred language. The Default Language value cannot be modified.For groups that are created after OU Localization is enabled, the group's default language is set to the preferred language of the administrator who creates the group. This is set at the time the group is created.For groups that are created before OU Localization is enabled, the group's default language is set to the default language of the portal's top-level OU. This is set when OU Localization is enabled. XE "Self Registration" To create a self-registration group, go to XE "Self Registration" Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Organizational Units > Manage Self Registration Groups. Then, click the Create New Self Registration Group link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYSelf Registration Groups - ManageGrants ability to create and update/edit self-registration groups, which are configured to make a self-registration page available to people who are not added to the portal via user feed. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration XE "Organizational Unit" Preferences by OU XE "Organizational Unit" When setting preferences by organizational unit (OU) and selecting an OU, the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language.When searching for an OU by name, the search results include any OU that has a title that matches the search query. When searching by OU title, the search results are dependent on the localizations that are available for the OU name and the default language of the OU. See Localization End User Experience PAGEREF _Ref1494808699 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 105 for additional information.Permission Constraints XE "Security" When creating or editing a security role or viewing a user's permissions, if any permission constraints or general constraints restrict the user or role to an organizational unit (OU), the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language.Add Constraints Pop-up XE "Role" Create/Edit Security Role - Constraints XE "User" View User Permissions XE "Email" Email Tags XE "Organizational Unit" When organizational unit (OU) tags are added to an email trigger, the OU name within the email subject or body should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language.This applies to the following email tags:RECIPIENT.DIVISIONRECIPIENT.POSITIONUSER.DIVISIONUSER.POSITION XE "Organizational Unit" Select OU Pop-ups XE "User" When viewing a Select OU pop-up, the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. This applies to all Select OU pop-ups, including single and multi-select pop-ups that use the new and old design.In addition, the Select OU pop-up that utilizes the new design is enhanced to include the ability to search for an OU by title or ID. The search results include any OU that has a title or ID that matches the search query. When searching by OU title, the search results are dependent on the localizations that are available for the OU name and the default language of the OU. See Localization End User Experience PAGEREF _Ref1494808699 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 105 for additional information.When a search is performed, the following information is displayed for each OU that matches the search query:TitleIDParentSelect OU - Old DesignSelect OU - New DesignSelect OU - New Design - Search Results XE "User" Select User Pop-ups XE "Organizational Unit" When viewing a Select User pop-up, the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. This applies to all Select User pop-ups, including single and multi-select pop-ups that use the new and old design.Select User - Old DesignSelect User - New Design XE "User" User Cards XE "Organizational Unit" When viewing a user card, the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. This applies to all user cards, including user cards that use the new and old anization Chart XE "Universal Profile" Universal Profile XE "My Team" My Team Drop-downPredictive Search XE "Organizational Unit" When searching for people using predictive search, the OU name should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. This applies to all predictive search fields.Custom Reports XE "Organizational Unit" When creating or editing a custom report, any organizational unit (OU) name that is displayed on the User/OU Filters tab or on the Sharing tab should be displayed in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. XE "Organizational Unit" In addition, if any OU name is included in a custom report, then the OU name is displayed in the report output in the user's preferred language. If a translation is not available for the user's preferred language, then the name is displayed in the OU's default language. XE "User" User/OU Filters TabSharing Tab XE "Organizational Unit" Organizational Unit (OU) Preferences Optimization XE "Performance" This optimization improves the back-end performance for settings that can be configured by organizational unit (OU). Core Preference pages impacted by this update include Languages, Time Zone, Navigation Tabs and Links, Theme and Logo, and Welcome Pages, among others. These updates are entirely back-end and are not expected to impact the day-to-day experience. Although there are no visible changes to these areas, clients are encouraged to test during User Acceptance Testing (UAT) to validate that the experience remains the same. For example, navigate to Time Zones preferences, make a change and save it, then navigate back to ensure the change was properly changed.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations.Portuguese Language Pack EnhancementsWith the February 2016 release, Cornerstone is revising the translations for the Portuguese (Brazil) language pack. Over 200 translation changes are made across the portal.The following table includes some of the updated areas.English Previous TranslationNew Translation XE "Applicant" ApplicantInscrito Pré-CandidatosTrainingForma?ao AND treinamentoTreinamentoManagergerentegestor XE "Rating" RatingClassifica??oPontua??oregistrationregistroinscri??o XE "Application" ApplicationInscri??oCandidaturaSubjectsMatériasAssuntosSubordinatesColaboradorSubordinado XE "Custom Reports" Analytics Análises Relatórios Personalizados XE "Proxy Enrollment" ProxyAssigna??oProxyImplementationThis functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Portuguese (Brazil) language pack. Any custom translations that have been added throughout the portal are not affected by this enhancement.Real Time Data WarehouseThe Real Time Data Warehouse (RTDW) is a new optimized data warehouse solution, which will replace the existing data warehouse solution currently used by the Cornerstone reporting tools. New hardware and software solutions have been utilized to build a new data warehouse solution. With this solution, Cornerstone will use synchronous replication to ensure that the RTDW is updated within minutes instead of once a day.Starting with the February ’16 release, Cornerstone will begin enabling the RTDW in batches. Portals will be identified and enabled weekly throughout February and March. RTDW will be enabled in all portals by April 2016.Use Case XE "Security" Sam Smith completes the compliance online course IT Security. His manager creates a transcript status report using the Transcript custom report type. With the RTDW, the result of his course completion will be visible in the report within minutes of Sam completing the course.Custom Reports in Real TimeOnce RTDW is enabled, all custom report categories will use the RTDW. Any custom report that is created or refreshed will have data that has been updated within minutes.There will be no impact with any existing custom reports. You will be able to view or edit any custom reports created prior to the enablement of the RTDW. Once a custom report is refreshed, the report output will run using the RTDW. This means that the data in the report is just a few minutes old.When the RTDW is enabled, your portal will no longer need to undergo daily data warehouse refreshes. The data warehouse will refresh every few minutes.The timestamp indicating when the data warehouse was refreshed will no longer be visible in the Custom Reports Main page.Enablement Status MessageDuring the enablement process for the RTDW, the main Custom Reports page will display a message indicating that some categories are in real time and includes the standard data warehouse refresh date/time stamp.If the RTDW is not yet enabled in your portal, the main Custom Reports page will display the standard data warehouse refresh date/time stamp.Once your portal is fully enabled, no message appears on the Custom Reports page.Standard Reports in Real TimeOnce the RTDW is enabled, any standard reports previously using the data warehouse will now use the RTDW. As a result, data for these reports will be updated within minutes and will no longer need a daily data warehouse refresh.Any standard reports using the live, transaction data, will not be impacted and will continue to use the live data.Exceptions - Replicated Data Warehouse SolutionThere will be no impact for clients using the Replicated Data Warehouse Solution (rDW). The rDW will continue to run from the current data warehouse and will not be moved to the RTDW. XE "Organizational Unit" View OU and User Identifiers in Availability and Group Criteria XE "Group" Prior to this enhancement, when modifying Availability controls and Group criteria, administrators had difficulty distinguishing between similarly-named OUs or similarly named users. XE "Application" With this enhancement, administrators now see identifiers (IDs) displayed in Group criteria and in many places where Availability is used throughout the application. For these places, IDs are displayed beside the Organizational Units (OUs) and Users. This functionality, which gives administrators the ability to easily distinguish between similarly named OUs and Users, has been frequently requested by clients, particularly through Suggestion City. XE "User" When viewing or setting the criteria for a group, the user or OU ID is displayed in parentheses to the right of the corresponding user or OU.When viewing or setting the availability criteria for any item throughout the system, the OU ID is displayed in parentheses to the right of the corresponding OU. Also, the description text is changed from "All employees in OU: OU Name (OU ID)" to "All users in OU: OU Name (OU ID)." Note: This does not apply when setting group criteria.Limitations XE "Email" The identifiers display for many Availability controls throughout the application, but this functionality is not available for all Availability controls. Some examples of where Availability controls do include the OU and user identifiers are Email Administration, Custom Field Administration, and Group Criteria. Some examples of where availability controls do not include identifiers are Development Plan Templates, User Development Plans, Training Unit Assignment, and Goal Library. XE "Feedback" Cornerstone will continue to collect feedback from clients regarding other areas where identifiers should be displayed in Availability controls throughout the application.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYOU Group - Manage XE "Provider" Grants ability to create, copy, and update/edit custom groups of users without allowing ability to manage org units. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationOU Group - UpdateGrants access to edit existing custom groups of users. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationOU Group - ViewGrants access to view existing custom groups. This permission can be constrained by OU. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationWeb Services Optimization XE "User" In an effort to better secure and track Web Service access, Cornerstone is turning off Web Service access for only those clients who have never accessed SOAP APIs. This ensures that Cornerstone is able to more thoroughly track and enhance Web Services going forward. Once disabled, user accounts within the portal are not able to access SOAP APIs. XE "Test" Upon release, Web Service access is automatically disabled on the back-end without any impact to clients actively using Web Services. Please test Web Services during User Acceptance Testing (UAT) to validate the experience and that there is no service disruption. XE "Learning" LearningAdded Custom Fields for Auditing for Outbound Data Feed XE "Course Catalog" With February 2016 release, various fields in the Course Catalog, Material Administration, Curriculum Administration, and Events and Sessions areas of the Learning module are now audited, and the audits are stored to Cornerstone's databases. This allows for stronger tracking and compliance over critical Learning fields.The following fields are now audited, and the audits are stored to Cornerstone's databases:Course Catalog - Date and Short Text type custom fields XE "Curricula" Curricula Administration - Date and Short Text type custom fields XE "Material" Material Administration - Date and Short Text type custom fields XE "Event" Event and Sessions - Date and Short Text type custom fieldsWith regards to Date and Short Text type custom fields, the following actions are now audited, and the audits are stored to Cornerstone's databases:Modifications to the Date and Short Text type custom field details via Training Custom Field Administration.Modifications to Date and Short Text type custom fields in Course Catalog, Curricula Administration, Material Administration, and Events and Sessions.Deletion of Date and Short Text type custom fields in Course Catalog, Curricula Administration, Material Administration, and Events and Sessions.ImplementationThis functionality can be utilized by organizations using the Learning module.The new fields can only be accessed via an Outbound Data Feed (ODF).For organizations with an existing ODF, please submit a case to GPS. A fee may apply depending on the effort.For organizations that do not currently have an ODF, contact Sales, your Client Executive, or your CSM to initiate a technical project. Fees may apply.Citrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit IncreaseCitrix GoToMeeting Attendee Limit IncreasePrior to this enhancement, organizations could only launch meetings via Citrix GoToMeeting with up to 25 attendees. XE "License" With this enhancement, organizations now have the ability to launch meetings via Citrix GoToMeeting with up to 100 attendees based on their current license limit. This enables organizations using Citrix GoToMeeting to have access to the full functionality of their applicable portal license. Organizations can control their maximum attendee limit via a new GoToMeeting Attendee Limit field on the Citrix Preferences page. Use Cases XE "Learning" David is a learning administrator who would like to schedule a virtual instructor led training session via Citrix GoToMeeting. His company, On Time Trucking, has a Citrix account with a GoToMeeting license that now supports up to 75 attendees. This license previously supported 25 attendees. David wants to host these GoToMeeting trainings in the LMS. He navigates to the Citrix Preferences page where he is able to indicate the GoToMeeting attendee limit of 75. He creates a session with the Provider of GoToMeeting and sets the maximum limit of 75. The LMS matches this limit against the Citrix Preference and validates against the Citrix Portal License when the session is created.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations with a Citrix GoToMeeting integration. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCitrix Portal Preferences - GotoMeeting - ManageGrants ability to manage GotoMeeting Preferences within Citrix Portal Preferences. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationEvents - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create new instructor led training events. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationEvents - Edit XE "User" Grants ability to edit/update existing instructor led training events. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationSessions - Create XE "Provider" Grants ability to create new instructor led training sessions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. Administrators can only create sessions for events for which they have the availability to view. When adding users to a session in which the session roster is full, this permission grants the ability to increase the session's available seats. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Instructor, User as Instructor, Facility, Facilities Owned by User, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationSessions - EditGrants ability to edit/update existing instructor led training sessions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. Administrators can only edit sessions for which they have the availability to view and edit. When adding users to a session in which the session roster is full, this permission grants the ability to increase the session's available seats. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Instructor, User as Instructor, Facility, Facilities Owned by User, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationCitrix PreferencesWith this enhancement, a new GoToMeeting Attendee Limit field is now available on the Citrix Portal Preferences. This field enables administrators to limit the number of attendees for their GoToMeeting sessions. Administrators should be sure to enter a value that is within the limit of their current Citrix account. The maximum value for this field is 100. If no value is entered, then this field defaults to 25.To access Citrix Portal Preferences, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Learning Preferences > Citrix Preferences.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCitrix Portal Preferences - GotoMeeting - ManageGrants ability to manage GotoMeeting Preferences within Citrix Portal Preferences. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Event" Event/Session Creation - Maximum Registration XE "Session" When creating an event or a session, the system verifies that the value entered in the Maximum Registration field is less than or equal to the limit that is set in Citrix Preferences and with the organization's Citrix GoToMeeting portal. The system also performs this validation when a preferred instructor is changed for an event or when an instructor is changed for a session. If the value that is entered in the Maximum Registration is greater than the limit that is set in Citrix Preferences or with the organization's Citrix GoToMeeting portal, then an error message is displayed. This validation prevents administrators from creating a session in which registered users are not able to join the GoToMeeting session.The maximum value for this field is 100. Note: If a session is edited but the instructor is not changed, the Maximum Registration value is validated against the Citrix Preferences, but it is not validated against the limit that is set in the organization's Citrix GoToMeeting portal. In this scenario, it is possible that more users register for a session than is allowed by Citrix. Once the Citrix limit is reached, users will receive an error message from Citrix when they launch the session. To create an ILT event, go to ILT > Manage Events & Sessions. Then, click the Create New Event link.To create an ILT event session, go to ILT > Manage Events & Sessions. Search for the appropriate event and in the Options column next to the event, click the View Sessions icon . To create a new session, you can do so via one of the following options:Click Create New Session to create a new session.Click Copy icon to create a copy of an existing session which can be changed or edited and saved as a new session.Click Edit icon to modify an existing session.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYEvents - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create new instructor led training events. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission. XE "Learning" Learning - AdministrationEvents - Edit XE "Provider" Grants ability to edit/update existing instructor led training events. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationSessions - CreateGrants ability to create new instructor led training sessions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. Administrators can only create sessions for events for which they have the availability to view. When adding users to a session in which the session roster is full, this permission grants the ability to increase the session's available seats. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Instructor, User as Instructor, Facility, Facilities Owned by User, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationSessions - EditGrants ability to edit/update existing instructor led training sessions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. Administrators can only edit sessions for which they have the availability to view and edit. When adding users to a session in which the session roster is full, this permission grants the ability to increase the session's available seats. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Instructor, User as Instructor, Facility, Facilities Owned by User, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Data Load Wizard" Data Load Wizard Test Question Bank and Transcript Load Field Changes XE "Question Bank" In the Question Bank Data Load, the Reference Number column is renamed to Question Reference Number. This applies when loading questions and question responses. XE "Transcript" In the Transcript Data Load, the Learning Object/Reference Number ID column is renamed to Learning Object ID/Training Reference Number.This enhancement is intended to make the field names more clear.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Data Load Wizard for Transcript Data and Question Data.In order to purchase the Data Load Wizard, please contact Sales or your Client Executive. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Learning" Data Load Wizard - LearningEnables administrator to load learning data via the Data Load Wizard. This permission also enables administrators to track data loads and manage data load templates. This is an administrator permission.Data Load Wizard XE "Test" Data Load Wizard - Load Test QuestionsEnables administrator to load test question data via the Data Load Wizard. This permission also enables administrators to track data loads and manage data load templates. This is an administrator permission.Data Load WizardData Load Wizard - Load TranscriptsEnables administrator to load transcript data via the Data Load Wizard. This permission also enables administrators to track data loads and manage data load templates. This is an administrator permission.Data Load Wizard XE "Provider" Edit Provider for Online CoursesEdit Provider for Online Courses XE "Course Publisher" Prior to this enhancement, administrators could only set the provider for an online course when creating a new publication via the Course Publisher. Once the online course was published, administrators could not edit the provider. XE "Course Catalog" With this enhancement, administrators can now edit the provider for an online course via the Course Catalog. Also, when creating a new publication via the Course Publisher, no default provider is set for a course. Administrators are required to set a provider for the online course upon creating the publication.Implementation XE "Learning" Upon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Learning module. XE "Security" SecurityThe following new permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYEdit Online Course Providers XE "User" Grants ability to edit the Provider field for an online course via the Course Catalog. User must also have permission to update the Course Catalog. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Important: Constraints are available for this permission (Provider and User's ILT Provider). However, these constraints are not enforced. Administrators with this permission can select any provider for an Online Course. Learning - AdministrationThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCourse Catalog - Update XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to manage/edit learning objects listed in the Course Catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Training Type, Training Item, Provider, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, User Self and Subordinates, and User's LO Availability. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Course Publisher" Course Publisher - Create New PublicationWith this enhancement, when an administrator is creating a new publication, there is no default value for the XE "Provider" Provider field. Administrators are required to select a provider for the online course.To create a new online course, go to Content > Course Publisher. Then, click the Create New Publication link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCourse Publisher XE "SCORM" Grants access to LCMS Course Publisher, which enables upload and publishing of SCORM and AICC compliant online courses, created either in the LCMS Course Builder, or from a third party course building tool. Also requires assignment of LCMS license. This is an administrator permission. XE "Learning" Learning - AdministrationCourse Publisher Update XE "License" Grants ability to update existing online training courses previously published via the course publisher. Also requires assignment of LCMS license. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationTo select a provider for the online course, click the Select Provider icon . From the Search Providers pop-up, select the appropriate provider. This field is required. XE "Course Catalog" Course Catalog - GeneralWhen editing an online course via the Course Catalog, the XE "Provider" Provider field on the General page can now be edited. This field is only editable by users who have permission to edit online course providers.To access the Course Catalog, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Catalog Management > Course Catalog.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCourse Catalog - Update XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to manage/edit learning objects listed in the Course Catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, Training Type, Training Item, Provider, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, User, User Self and Subordinates, and User's LO Availability. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationEdit Online Course ProvidersGrants ability to edit the Provider field for an online course via the Course Catalog. User must also have permission to update the Course Catalog. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Important: Constraints are available for this permission (Provider and User's ILT Provider). However, these constraints are not enforced. Administrators with this permission can select any provider for an Online Course. Learning - AdministrationTo edit the Provider field for an online course, click the pop-up icon . From the Search Providers pop-up, select the appropriate provider. This field is only editable for online courses, and it can only be edited by users who have permission to edit online course providers.To remove the existing provider, click the Remove icon . This field is required, so a new provider must be selected in order to save the online course.Enhanced GetDetails Web Service XE "Session" With this enhancement, a PartName field is added to the GetDetails web service response for session learning objects (LOs). The PartName field is the title of the session part.ImplementationThis Web Service is automatically available to all portals that have purchased it.If you have purchased Web Services usage, but need access to this specific one, please contact CSOD via a GPS case to enable.If you have not purchased Web Services at all, please contact Sales or Client Executive to purchase. XE "Learning Object" Learning Object Details Map View for ILT PreviewLearning Object Details Map View for ILT OverviewWith the new geolocation and postal code search features, learners can now easily find instructor-led training (ILT) sessions that are taking place near their own or a preferred location. This enhancement enables the process of finding sessions to be more intuitive and accessible. XE "Program" Preview Program XE "User" This feature will be enabled for select clients during the first stage refresh on 21 January 2016. This feature will not be enabled automatically for UAT (user acceptance testing) and Production.Use CaseRachel is an employee at GlamourShoes, a global organization with offices throughout the United States. Rachel works in the Sales division for the Northeast region and works remotely from her home in New York. GlamourShoes requires that Rachel engage in quarterly in-person sales training to keep up to date on the company's new products and collaborate with other salespeople. Since GlamourShoes employees work and live across the United States, there are sessions of the quarterly sales training in several locations from California to New York. Rachel, living in the Northeast, needs to find the session of this training that is taking place closest to where she is located.Scenario 1 XE "Event" To find the appropriate session, Rachel searches for the quarterly sales training using Global Search. She finds the relevant training event, navigates to the Event LO (learning object) Details, and is able to filter session results using a geolocation search. She inputs her address, defines a search radius within which she is comfortable traveling, and finds the session of the training that is closest to her and the most convenient for her to take.Scenario 2 XE "Browse" While Rachel is viewing courses in Browse for Training, she sees that the quarterly sales training is Suggested for her to take. She clicks on the sales training, navigates to the Event LO Details, and is able to filter session results using a geolocation search. She inputs her address, defines a search radius within which she is comfortable traveling, and finds the session of the training that is closest to her and the most convenient for her to take. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYILT Preferences - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to configure a variety of default settings that apply to new instructor led training events and sessions. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. XE "Learning" Learning - Administration XE "Learning Object" LO DetailEnables/disables permission that allows end users to navigate to the LO Details Page. This permission cannot be constrained.LearningOU Hierarchy - ManageGrants ability to create and update/edit organizational units and custom groups. This permission grants access to all OU types, both standard and custom. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationILT PreferencesWith this enhancement, geolocation options are added to ILT Preferences to allow administrators to enable or disable the geolocation features for users when searching for sessions.To configure ILT Preferences, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools> Learning > Learning Preferences > ILT Preferences.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYILT Preferences - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to configure a variety of default settings that apply to new instructor led training events and sessions. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationEnable Geolocation SearchAn Enable Geolocation Search on Event Training Details option is added to the Corporate Settings section on ILT Preferences. The option is enabled by default and allows users to search for sessions using the geolocation search features. When this option is disabled, the geolocation search options are not available for users when searching for sessions.Search RadiusThe search radius option displays in a new ILT Geolocation Search section. This option allows administrators to define the five radius options that will be available to users to select from a drop-down when searching for sessions. The radius options defined must be between 1 and 100. The default values are 1, 5, 10, 15, 25. Administrators can define one of the values as the default radius that will display in the drop-down.Manage Location XE "Organizational Unit" If configuring Location organizational units (OU) that may be used in sessions, the address entered into the address fields in the Facility Information section must be a valid address. When the Location OU is saved, the system attempts to validate the address. If the address is invalid, then a warning message appears, indicating that sessions at the location will not display for users in geolocation search results. You can modify the address to ensure that it is valid or save the Location OU without a valid address.To manage Location OUs, go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Organizational Units > Manage Organizational Unit Hierarchy > Location. Or, go to ILT > Facilities and Resources.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYOU Hierarchy - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to create and update/edit organizational units and custom groups. This permission grants access to all OU types, both standard and custom. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationSearch by GeolocationWith this enhancement, users can now search for sessions based on a geographical location. Users define a country, city and/or state, or postal code, and then select a desired radius from the location. The search results display all sessions that are within the geolocation.Pre-Populated User Record AddressFor users who have a physical address in their user record, the geolocation options are pre-populated with their default address values, provided that the address is valid. The radius is one mile by default. Pre-populating the geolocation values helps users quickly find sessions that are within a radius of their own location.Search for SessionsWhen searching for sessions using geolocation options, users define the following fields:Country - Select a country from the drop-down.Address - Enter a street address, city, and state or a postal code. The field accepts up to 500 characters.Radius - Select a radius from the drop-down. The options that are available are defined by the administrator in ILT Preferences.Users can enter values in the following combinations, in addition to the requirement of defining a country, in order for search results to display:Only cityOnly postal codeOnly street addressStreet address and cityStreet address and postal codeIf only a state is defined, then the geolocation search will not display any results.Once the fields are defined, click search.Note: If the address that is entered is invalid, then a message displays indicating that the address could not be found.Search Results - Map & List ViewUsers can view a list and map by clicking the icon. The search results display the sessions that are within the defined search radius, sorted by proximity. A list of up to 10 sessions per page displays on the left, and a map on the right shows the pinpoints of the session locations.Sessions ListThe following information displays for each session in the list:Title - The session title displays as a link. Click the link to view the Training Details page. The search results are retained when returning to the session list.Radius - This displays the distance from the location in miles. XE "Provider" Provider XE "Subject" Subject - This displays the subject category for the event.Available LanguagesPriceDescriptionSession Start Date, End Date, Time, Time ZoneOptions - This displays a drop-down of the actions available for the user to take or a non-actionable status. The following options display if available:Add to Cart XE "Training Plan" Add to Training Plan XE "Assign" AssignNoneNo OpeningsRegistration Closed XE "Request" RequestRequestedWaitlistedNumber of Session Seats Available or Number of Waitlist Openings - If there are seats available for the session, then the number of seats displays. If there are no available seats but a waitlist is available, then the number of waitlist openings displays. If there are no available seats and no waitlist openings, then "No seats available" displays.MapThe map shows pinpoints with the location of each session within the defined search radius. Clicking a pinpoint displays a hover message that includes the session name, date, time, and number of openings. Each pinpoint is numbered based on the closest proximity to the address.The map is interactive. Users can zoom in or out or re-center the map. The list of sessions does not update when zooming.If more than one session is located at a single address, then the map displays multiple pinpoints at the location. The hover lists up to 10 sessions at the location, as well as the name, date, time, and number of openings.Search Results - List View OnlyClick the icon to view the search results as a list only. The map does not display in this view. Up to 20 results display per page.As with existing functionality, the Show drop-down allows you to filter by available or all sessions. You can also click the View Full Calendar option to view the list of sessions on a calendar.The following information displays for each session in the list:Title - The session title displays as a link. Click the link to view the Training Details page. The search results are retained when returning to the session list.Provider XE "Event" Subject - This displays the subject category for the event.DurationPriceSession Start Date, End Date, Time, Time ZoneAvailable LanguagesAvailable/Waitlist - This column displays the number of seats available for the session. If there are no available seats but a waitlist is available, then the number of waitlist openings displays. If there are no available seats and no waitlist openings, then "No seats available" displays.Actions - This column displays a drop-down of the actions available for the user to take or a non-actionable status. The following options display:Add to CartAdd to Training PlanAssignNoneNo OpeningsRegistration ClosedRequestRequestedWaitlistedThe Notify me of new sessions option displays at the bottom of the page. There are no functionality changes to this option.Error Message - "Map Search is currently not available"An error message, "Map Search is currently not available," may display if you have not used the map search feature in several days and the user has a default address. To resolve the error, simply enter your search terms and conduct a search, and your search results should display as expected. XE "Learning Object" Learning Object Details - Sessions Tab XE "Learning Object" The Learning Object (LO) Details page for events is easier to navigate with a new “Sessions” tab that separates Session information from other details, ratings and reviews. XE "Session" In addition, if there are seats available for the session, then the number of seats displays. If there are no available seats but a waitlist is available, then the number of waitlist openings displays. If there are no available seats and no waitlist openings, then "No seats available" displays. XE "Event" See LO Details - Details - Event LO - Sessions.Implementation XE "Learning" This functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Learning module.These changes are automatically applied to all new and existing events. Content IntegrationAn integration is now available for . With this enhancement, a scheduled, automated process automatically recognizes any newly created content within the organization's portal. The system then processes the new content and publishes the content within Cornerstone. Outbound SSO is applied to each online course to allow users to seamlessly launch online courses within the Cornerstone system.This enables organizations to more effectively provide content within the Cornerstone system. Also, users can conveniently locate and complete the training within the Cornerstone system without needing to log in to the portal.Implementation XE "Learning" In order to utilize this functionality, organizations need to purchase and implement the integration. In addition, organizations must enable Focused Learning within their portal in order for the integration to properly capture course completion data.In order to purchase this integration, please contact Sales or your Client Executive. XE "Material" Material Versioning Full Roll-outMaterial Versioning Full Roll-outTo better support compliance needs and strengthen data integrity, versioning functionality for materials is fully required with the February ’16 Release. Depending on the need, organizations can choose to use either Simplified Versioning or Material Versioning with Append. Simplified Versioning is the default option. XE "Approval" With Simplified Versioning, the Version icon is removed from the Material Administration page and a new version is only be triggered when modifying the material source. Also, a new version is only triggered for a material if users of any status are enrolled in the material. This includes any status after the user requests the material (e.g., Pending Approval, Rejected). If the administrator also has the appropriate permission, the administrator can choose which users are assigned the updated version.See Simplified Versioning Overview PAGEREF _Ref-1183763691 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 163 for additional information. XE "Action" With Versioning with Append, administrators initiate a new version of a material by clicking the Version icon on the Material Administration page. This action creates a new material version, regardless of what changes are made to the material. Administrators must either Replace or Append the previous version to create a new version. Administrators are able to make minor edits to the material without creating a new version by simply editing the material. If in use, users now have the ability to modify the Start Date on the General tab. See Versioning with Append Overview PAGEREF _Ref-571995758 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 174 for additional information. XE "Learning Object" Please note that creating a new version of a material, either using Simplified Versioning or Versioning with Append, triggers a new LO ID and a new Curriculum version if the material is in a Curriculum.In addition, the following enhancements are made to the material versioning process, regardless of which method is used: XE "Curricula" Impacted Curricula - On the Reversion Options page, administrators can now easily view all curricula that contain the reversioned material and will be reversioned as a result of reversioning the material. See Versioning - Impacted Curricula PAGEREF _Ref2092137599 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 179 for additional information. XE "Assign" Version Number Filter - On the Reversion Options page, a new filter is now available, which enables administrators to easily assign the new material version to users who are currently enrolled in a specific version of the material. See Versioning - Version Number Filter PAGEREF _Ref-174946323 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 183 for additional information.Version Equivalency - On the Reversion Options page, a new option may be available, which enables administrators to choose whether or not the new version is equivalent to the previous version. The availability of this option is controlled by a backend setting, which is disabled by default. See Versioning - Version Equivalency PAGEREF _Ref2086889382 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 181 for additional information.Save Material Source - On the General page, a material source file is not saved until the administrator saves the material. As a result, the title of the material source file displays as text until the material is saved. Once the material is saved and the General page is viewed, the material source file displays as a link, and administrators can click the source file to open the file. See Versioning - Save Material Source PAGEREF _Ref-433672591 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 180 for additional information. XE "Course Catalog" Course Catalog - All modifications to a material's source must be done via Material Administration. When editing a material via the Course Catalog, the Material Source value is displayed, but it cannot be modified. This ensures that the material is properly versioned when the material source is modified. See Versioning - Course Catalog PAGEREF _Ref-1683093231 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 177 for additional information.Implementation XE "Learning" Upon release, Material Versioning is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module.Simplified Versioning is the default method of material versioning, and it is automatically enabled for all organizations that have not used the Material Versioning functionality prior to the February '16 release.Versioning with Append was previously enabled by default with the October '15 release, but it is now available by request. However, Versioning with Append is automatically enabled for all organizations that have used the Material Versioning functionality prior to the February '16 release.To enable Versioning with Append, contact Global Product Support (GPS). XE "Role" Upon release, the new Material Version - Replace Only - Manage permission is automatically added to the general system administrator role for organizations using Simplified Versioning.Upon release, the following enhancements are automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module:Impacted CurriculaVersion Number FilterSave Material SourceCourse CatalogVersion Equivalency XE "Security" SecurityThe following new permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Version - Replace Only - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to assign a new version of a material to a user. The constraints on this permission determine to which users the administrator can assign a new version of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users. This is an administrator permission.This permission only applies to organizations that are using Simplified Versioning for materials.Learning - AdministrationWith this release, the Material Version - Manage permission is renamed and is now titled Material Version with Append - Manage. These changes will be reflected throughout Online Help when this functionality is released.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Version with Append - ManageGrants ability to create versions of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users.This permission only applies to organizations that are using Versioning with Append for materials.Learning - AdministrationThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterials Management XE "Provider" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - AdministrationSimplified VersioningSimplified Versioning Overview XE "Material" Simplified Versioning is the default method of material versioning, and it is automatically enabled for all organizations that have not used the Material Versioning functionality prior to the February '16 release. XE "Approval" With Simplified Versioning for materials, material versioning is managed entirely by the system and it is only triggered when making a substantial change to the material source. Also, a new version is only triggered for a material if users of any status are enrolled in the material. This includes any status after the user requests the material (e.g., Pending Approval, Rejected). Once a substantial change is made, a new version is created. If the administrator also has the appropriate permission, the administrator can choose which user will receive the updated version.A new material version is triggered if there is a change to the Material Source and all of the following are true:The Material Source file is added or removed, the Material Source URL is changed, or the Material Source type is modified.The material's default language is impacted.At least one user has been enrolled in the material.A new material version is not triggered if there is a change to the Material Source if the following are true:The Material Source is localized. For example, if a material is created with a material source file in English (US), and then the material is modified to include additional source files that only apply to French (France) and French (Canada), then this modification does not create a new version.The name of a material source file is changed.No users have ever enrolled in the material.When editing a material, the system does not determine if a new material version should be created until the modified material is saved, which is done on the Emails page. This is because the modifications are not committed until the material is saved. As a result, if a material is modified and saved and the modification triggers a new material version, then the administrator is navigated to a Reversion Options page.The process of creating and versioning materials is very similar to the previously existing Materials and Materials Versioning (Versioning with Append) functionality with the following exceptions:See Simplified Versioning - Create Material - General PAGEREF _Ref1148680415 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 167 for additional information.See Simplified Versioning - Create Version - Confirm PAGEREF _Ref-122653673 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 169 for additional information.See Simplified Versioning - Inactivate Pending Version PAGEREF _Ref521677374 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 170 for additional information.See Simplified Versioning - Replace Only Permission PAGEREF _Ref-291388441 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 171 for additional information.See Simplified Versioning - Saving a Material PAGEREF _Ref205476625 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 172 for additional information.See Simplified Versioning - Start and End Date PAGEREF _Ref1900556262 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 173 for additional information.In addition, the following enhancements are now available for Simplified Versioning and Versioning with Append:See Versioning - Course Catalog PAGEREF _Ref-1683093231 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 177 for additional information.See Versioning - Impacted Curricula PAGEREF _Ref2092137599 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 179 for additional information.See Versioning - Save Material Source PAGEREF _Ref-433672591 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 180 for additional information.See Versioning - Version Equivalency PAGEREF _Ref2086889382 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 181 for additional information.See Versioning - Version Number Filter PAGEREF _Ref-174946323 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 183 for additional information.For additional information on the previously existing Material Creation and Material Versioning functionality, see the Materials section of Online Help. See Materials Overview.Use Cases XE "Learning" Sarah is a learning administrator at Acme, a clothing company in California. Acme uses the Material learning object (LO) as a way to track miscellaneous training documents. They do not have to meet specific compliance requirements but are passionate about having a comprehensive Learning Management System (LMS) that tracks their documentation. Acme currently has their portal configured to use Simplified Versioning for Materials.Example 1: Triggering a New Version XE "Promotion" Sarah recently created a new material for a monthly promotion and uploaded a document on jewelry (the current promotion) as the source. A month later, Sarah edits the material, removing the previous document on jewelry and adding a new document on scarves (the new promotion). The LMS identifies that the Material Source was changed, notes that users are currently enrolled in the material, and triggers a new version of the material. Sarah is automatically brought to the Create Version pages where she is able to set reversion options and confirm the versioning. The material is successfully versioned and tracked in Material Administration.Example 2: Not Triggering a New Version XE "Learning" Sarah recently created a new material and set a URL as the source. Since Acme has stores in England and Spain, she localized the Material Source to include the English (UK) and Spanish (Spain) URLs. A month later, she edits the material, adding a URL for French users. Since the Material Source is changed for a language that is different than the default language of the Material (English US), the LMS does not trigger a new version of the material and saves the material with the added URL source.Example 3: Not Triggering a New Version XE "Document" Sarah recently created a new material for a monthly promotion and uploaded a document on shoes (the current promotion) as the source. A month later, Sarah edits the material, removing the document on shoes and adding a new document on hats (the new promotion). The LMS identifies that the Material Source was changed and notes that there are currently no users enrolled in the material. Since the material does not have any users that are currently enrolled in it, the LMS does not trigger a new version of the material and saves the material with the new file source. XE "Material" Simplified Versioning - Create Material - GeneralWhen using Simplified Versioning, the Version Details section is no longer available when creating or editing a material. When editing a material and a new version is created, the Effective Date is now set on the Reversion Options page. See Simplified Versioning - Create Version - Reversion Options PAGEREF _Ref-1478226466 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 168 for additional information.Simplified Versioning - Create Version - Reversion Options XE "Material" When using Simplified Versioning, the following modification has been made to the Reversion Options page when creating a new material version:The Effective Date setting is moved from the General page to the Reversion Options page.Simplified Versioning - Create Version - Confirm XE "Material" When using Simplified Versioning, the following modification has been made to the Confirm page when creating a new material version: XE "Preference" The Version Summary section is removed because materials do not have a Versioning Preference or Start Date.Simplified Versioning - Inactivate Pending Version XE "Material" When using Simplified Versioning, a material may have a maximum of one active version and one pending version. If an administrator modifies the material source and the material already has a pending version, then a pop-up appears when the administrator attempts to save the material modifications. The pop-up informs the administrator that the material already has one pending version and provides the administrator with the following options:Click Cancel to preserve the existing pending version. Any unsaved changes to the material are discarded, and the administrator is navigated to the Material Administration page.Click OK to inactivate the existing pending version and continue to create a new material version. The administrator is navigated to the Reversion Options page.Simplified Versioning - Replace Only Permission XE "Material" When using Simplified Versioning, a new "Material Version - Replace Only - Manage" permission is now available. This permission grants administrators the ability to assign a new version of a material to a user. The constraints on this permission determine to which users the administrator can assign a new version of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. XE "Organizational Unit" This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users. XE "Role" Upon release, the new Material Version - Replace Only - Manage permission is automatically added to the general system administrator role.If the administrator has this permission with no constraints, then the Reversion Options page displays all users to whom the new material version can be assigned.If the administrator has this permission and is constrained by an OU, then the Reversion Options page displays only users within that OU to whom the new material version can be assigned.If the administrator does not have this permission, then the Reversion Options page does not display any users. The new material version is created, but the administrator cannot assign the new version to any users.The availability of this permission is controlled by a backend setting. If this backend setting is disabled, then the Reversion Options page does not display any users. New material versions can be created, but administrators cannot assign the new version to any users. XE "Material" Simplified Versioning - Saving a MaterialIf an organization was previously using Versioning with Append and administrators created new versions of materials using the Append method, then those materials cannot be reversioned if the organization begins using Simplified Versioning. This is because a material that was reversioned using the Append method cannot be reversioned using the Replace method, and Simplified Versioning only utilizes the Replace method.If an administrator attempts to save a change to the material that triggers a new version and the material was previously reversioned using the Append method, then the administrator will receive an error message when they click the Save button on the Emails page. This error message indicates that the material previously utilized the Append method of reversioning and cannot change to use the Replace method. In this scenario, the changes are not saved, and the administrator must create a new material in order to make the necessary changes.Simplified Versioning - Start and End DateWhen using Simplified Versioning, materials do not have a Start Date and End Date.In order to support this functionality, the Start Date and End Date are no longer displayed on the following pages when using Simplified Versioning: XE "Learning Object" LO Details Page XE "Transcript" Transcript Details PageVersioning with AppendVersioning with Append Overview XE "Request" Versioning with Append was previously enabled by default with the October '15 release, but it is now available by request. However, Versioning with Append is automatically enabled for all organizations that have used the Material Versioning functionality prior to the February '16 release. XE "Action" With Versioning with Append for materials, administrators initiate a new version of a material by clicking the Version icon on the Material Administration page. This action creates a new version, regardless of what changes are made to the material. Administrators must either Replace or Append the previous version to create a new version. Administrators are able to make minor edits to the material without creating a new version by simply editing the material.The process of creating and versioning materials is the same as the previously existing Materials and Materials Versioning (Versioning with Append) functionality with the following enhancement:See Versioning with Append - Start Date PAGEREF _Ref-176915444 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 176 for additional information.In addition, the following enhancements are now available for Simplified Versioning and Versioning with Append:See Versioning - Course Catalog PAGEREF _Ref-1683093231 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 177 for additional information.See Versioning - Impacted Curricula PAGEREF _Ref2092137599 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 179 for additional information.See Versioning - Save Material Source PAGEREF _Ref-433672591 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 180 for additional information.See Versioning - Version Equivalency PAGEREF _Ref2086889382 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 181 for additional information.See Versioning - Version Number Filter PAGEREF _Ref-174946323 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 183 for additional information.For additional information on the previously existing Material Creation and Material Versioning functionality, see the Materials section of Online Help. See Materials Overview.Versioning with Append - Start Date XE "Material" When using Versioning with Append and editing a material, administrators can now edit the Start Date of a material if the Start Date is in the future. Administrators can also edit the Start Date of a material if the Start Date is not currently set. The new Start Date of the version must always be after the previous Start Date of the same version. This enables administrators to update a material's Start Date in certain scenarios without needing to create a new material version.Administrators cannot modify a material's Start Date if the Start Date is in the past.Setting or updating the Start Date also updates the End Date of the previous material version.Use Case - Modification of a Future Start Date XE "Learning" Ashley is a learning administrator at ACME Corp., and she has received the new IT procedure from John, the IT Security Manager. John advises that all employees at ACME Corp. should start being trained on this new procedure in 2016. Ashley notes that the Start Date of 01/01/2016 may be subject to change.On 11/24/2015, Ashley creates the new material version with the Append option and defines the Start Date as 01/01/2016. She assigns this new version to all the employees at ACME Corp. On 11/30/2016, John requests that Ashley update the Start Date to 02/01/2016. Ashley is able to update the Start Date to 02/01/2016. She notes that the previous version for 2015 is set to be automatically deactivated on the updated Start Date of the new version, which is now 02/01/2016.Use Case - No Original Start DatePeter is a learning administrator at Bank Corp., and he has received the new 2016 financial procedure from David, the company's Finance Director. David advises that all Finance Department employees at Bank Corp. should start being trained on this new procedure for 2016. However, David notes that the Start Date has not yet been released by the government.On 11/24/2015, Peter creates the new material version with the Append option and does not define the Start Date. He assigns this new version to the Finance Department employees at Bank Corp. On 11/30/2016, David requests that Peter set the Start Date to 01/01/2016. Peter is able to update the Start Date to 01/01/2016. Peter notes that the previous version for 2015 is set to be automatically deactivated on the Start Date of the new version, which is 01/01/2016.General Versioning Enhancements XE "Course Catalog" Versioning - Course Catalog XE "Material" All modifications to a material's source must be done via Material Administration. When editing a material via the Course Catalog, the Material Source value is displayed, but it cannot be modified. This ensures that the material is properly versioned when the material source is modified.This behavior is the same regardless of whether the organization is using Simplified Versioning or Versioning with Append. XE "Curricula" Versioning - Impacted Curricula XE "Material" When creating a new version of a material, the existing Impacted Curricula XE "Curricula" field is displayed as a link if there is at least one curriculum that is impacted by reversioning the material. Administrators can click the link to access a pop-up that displays the title, version number, and description for each of the impacted curricula. This enables administrators to easily review the impact of reversioning the material with regards to existing curricula.Click the Export to Excel XE "Document" link to export the list of impacted curricula to an Excel document. XE "Learning Object" Click a curriculum title to view the curriculum's Learning Object (LO) Details page. To return to the list of impacted curricula, administrators can use the breadcrumbs on the LO Details page.Use Cases XE "Learning" Jon is a learning administrator at ACME Corp. He is about to reversion a material and wants to quickly access the list of curricula that will be reversioned as a result of reversioning the material. He clicks the link on the Reversion Options page. This opens a list of all curricula that will get the new material and a new version. The list also provides a direct link to the Curricula Details for each curriculum. XE "Material" Versioning - Save Material SourceWhen uploading a new material source file on the General page, the file is not saved until the administrator saves the material. As a result, the title of the material source file displays as text until the material is saved. Once the material is saved and the General page is viewed, the material source file displays as a link, and administrators can click the source file to open the file.This behavior is the same regardless of whether the organization is using Simplified Versioning or Versioning with Append.Versioning - Version Equivalency XE "Material" When creating a new version of a material, a new Version Equivalency option is now available on the Reversion Options page.This option enables administrators to choose whether or not the new version is equivalent to the previous version. This setting only applies to the new material version and the previous version, not all previous versions.Requires Retraining - This option is selected by default. If this option is selected, the new version is not equivalent to the previous version. As a result, users who are assigned the new version must complete the new material version even if they have already completed the previous version.Versions Equivalent - If this option is selected, the new version is equivalent to the previously active version. As a result, users who are assigned the new version do not have to complete the material version if they have already completed the previous version. These users will have a status of Completed Equivalent. This applies to users who have already completed the previous version and who complete the previous version after the new version is created.When using Simplified Versioning, the new version is equivalent to the previously active version.When using Versioning with Append and the Replace option is selected for the new version, the new version is equivalent to the previously active version. When using Versioning with Append and the Append option is selected for the new version, the two active versions of the material are equivalent.Append Use Case 1: Version 1 and Version 2 are active. Version 3 is created, and it replaces Version 1. Now, Version 2 and Version 3 are active. Version 3 is equivalent to Version 2 because these versions are both active.Append Use Case 2: Version 1 and Version 2 are active. Version 3 is created, and it replaces Version 2. Now, Version 1 and Version 3 are active. Version 3 is equivalent to Version 1 because these versions are both active.Append Use Case 3: Version 2 is active. Version 3 is created, and it replaces Version 2. Now, Version 3 is active. Version 3 is equivalent to Version 2 because Version 2 is the previously active version.When editing an active or pending material, the Version Equivalency section on the General page displays the name and version number of the equivalent material version, if available. This section is only available if the material has one equivalent version.To remove an equivalent version, click the Remove icon in the Options column for the appropriate material version. A warning pop-up opens to confirm the removal. Removing an equivalent version only impacts users who are assigned the material in the future or who complete a previous version in the future. Tip: XE "Proxy Enrollment" If an administrator assigned a new version that is equal to the previous version, but the administrator wants one or more users to complete the new version of the material, the administrator can proxy enroll the users in the new material version and force initial enrollment.Use Cases XE "Learning" Ashley is a learning administrator at ACME Corp., and she creates a new version (v2.0) of the Company Compliance Material from the previous version (v1.0). This new material source document needs to be updated on each user's transcripts. However, the users who have already completed the previous version should not be required to retake the material. Ashley updates the material source document and chooses to make the new version an Equivalent Version to the previous version so that the Completed users do not have to retake the training. The ACME Corp. Compliance Material v2.0 is added in their transcripts with a status of Completed Equivalent.Versioning - Version Number Filter XE "Material" When creating a new version of a material, a new Version XE "Assign" filter is now available on the Reversion Options page. This drop-down filters the users by the version of the material in which they are currently enrolled. This enables administrators to easily assign the new material version to users who are currently enrolled in a specific version of the material. Administrators can select one of the existing versions of the material or all versions. For example, if All Versions is selected, then users who have any version of the material in an active status on their transcript are displayed in the Results section.The following material statuses are considered active:Not Started - This status includes users in a Registered, Registered Past Due, Register/Not Available, or Register/Not Available Past Due pleted - This status includes users in a Completed, Completed Equivalent, or Exempt status.Use Cases XE "Learning" Ashley is a learning administrator at ACME Corp., and she has six versions of the Company Compliance Document in the system. She needs to create a new version (v7.0) and assign this version to users who have version 6.0 on their transcript. When creating the new version, she accesses the Reversion Options page and is able to select v6.0 in the drop-down. This allows her to filter the users to ensure that only users with v6.0 on their transcript are assigned v7.0. XE "Material" Material - Add Subject XE "Subject" Prior to this enhancement, administrators could only associate a material with a subject via the Course Catalog.With this enhancement, administrators can now add one or more subjects to a material when creating or editing the material via Material Administration. An Add Subject link is available on the General page. Administrators can add one or more subjects. Adding a subject to a material is optional.Use Cases XE "Learning" A learning administrator creates a new material with a Title, Description, Material Type, Provider, and Material Source. She is also able to add two Subjects to the material directly from the Create Material page. She saves the material and is able to view it in Material Administration.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Version with Append - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create versions of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users.This permission only applies to organizations that are using Versioning with Append for materials.Learning - AdministrationMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - Administration XE "Material" Material - Copy Material XE "Learning Object" Prior to this enhancement, a material learning object (LO) could not be copied.With this enhancement, administrators can now copy material LOs from the Material Administration page. The Copy option is available in the Options column to administrators who have permission to manage materials. This option is available for all non-expired materials, including previous versions.ConsiderationsOn the General page, the following considerations apply: XE "Provider" The material's provider setting can be edited and provider constraints are enforced.If the administrator does not have permission to manage LO attachments, then any attachments are not copied. XE "Preference" If available, the Version Preference and Effective Date settings are not copied.On the Availability page, the following considerations apply:Custom groups and training request forms are copied.Use Cases XE "Learning" A learning administrator needs to create a new material. He notices that there is an existing material that almost exactly matches the material that he intends to create. He clicks the Copy icon next to the existing material and is brought to the Copy Material page. The page already contains the information from the existing material. He makes some minor changes to the fields on the General page, confirms the Availability and Emails, and clicks Save. The new material LO is created with the information.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYLO Attachments - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to upload attachments to learning objects. Administrators with this permission are automatically granted the LO Attachments - View permission. This permission can be constrained by User's ILT Provider, Provider, and ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - Administration XE "Material" Material - View History Details XE "Provider" With this enhancement, additional details are now captured in the Modification History section when creating or editing a material via Material Administration. This includes modifications to the material type, provider, and material source.Modifications to the following fields on the General page are now captured in Modification History when a material is created or modified:Material TypeAny changes that are made to a material type via Material Type Administration are not captured in the Modification History section when creating or editing a material. For example, if an administrator changes the name of a material type from Book to Publication via Material Type Administration, the material type name is updated when creating or editing a material, but this change is not tracked in the Modification History section.ProviderMaterial SourceAny localization changes made to the Material Source are captured and are visible in the Modification History section to all administrators regardless of the administrator's configured language.Modifications to the Material Source file on the General page are now captured in Modification History when a material is created or modified.Changes to the file name and localization are not captured in the Modification History section.Modifications to the Material Source from File to URL or from URL to File are now captured in Modification History when a material is created or modified.The following are examples of how changes appear in Modification History:Edit to Material Type - Material Type in English (US) changed from "Publication" to “Book” by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YYY HH:MM XE "Test" Edit to Material Source - Material Source in English (US) changed from "" to “” by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YYY HH:MMMaterial Type for New Material - Material created with English (US) Material Type "Publication" by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YYYY HH:MMProvider for New Material - Material created with English (US) Provider "CSOD" by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YYYY HH:MMMaterial Source for New Material - Material created with English (US) Material Source "" by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YYYY HH:MMAdded Material Source File - Material Source File in English (US) "test.docx" was added by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YY HH:MMEdit to Material Source Type - Material Source was changed from "URL" to "File" by Sarah Villamaino (svillamaino) on MM/DD/YY HH:MMUse Cases XE "Learning" A learning administrator navigates to a material and changes the Material Type. Another learning administrator notices the change and opens the Modification History to see who made the changes. She notices that the Modification History reflects all of the changes to the Material Type including who made the change, when the change was made, and what the field was changed from and to.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Version with Append - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create versions of a material. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Users.This permission only applies to organizations that are using Versioning with Append for materials.Learning - AdministrationMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - Administration XE "Material" Material - View UsersMaterial - View Users Overview XE "Transcript" Prior to this enhancement, administrators could not quickly view all users who have any version of a material on their transcript. With this enhancement, administrators can now view all users who have any version of a material on their transcript from the Material Administration page. Administrators can also access the Transcript Details of an enrolled user's material.Use Cases XE "Learning" Jon is a learning administrator at ACME Corp, and he wants to quickly access the list of users who are enrolled in a specific material. Jon clicks the View Users icon on the Material Administration page, which opens the Enrolled Employees page. On this page, he can filter by users or by version number and can export the results to Excel. Jon can also access the user's transcript details if he wants to view or edit the transcript details.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module.The new Material Management - View Users permission is automatically added to the default Administrator permission. If any constraints should be applied to this permission, this must be done upon release. XE "Security" SecurityThe following new permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Management - View Users XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view all users who have any version of the material on their transcript. Administrators with this permission can also access the transcript of enrolled users. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine for which materials the administrator is able to view users and which users the administrator is able to view on the Enrolled Employees page. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - Administration XE "Material" Material Administration - View Users IconWith this enhancement, a new View Users option XE "Transcript" is available in the Options column to administrators who have permission to view a material's enrolled users. This option is available for all non-expired materials, including previous versions. Clicking this option opens the Enrolled Employees page, which displays all users who have any version of a material on their transcript. See Material - View Users PAGEREF _Ref-2039514439 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 196 for additional information.To manage materials, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Catalog Management > Materials.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Management - View Users XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view all users who have any version of the material on their transcript. Administrators with this permission can also access the transcript of enrolled users. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine for which materials the administrator is able to view users and which users the administrator is able to view on the Enrolled Employees page. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - Administration XE "Material" Material - View Users XE "Transcript" The Enrolled Employees page enables administrators with the appropriate permissions to view all users who have any version of a material on their transcript from the Material Administration page. Administrators can also export the list of enrolled users to Excel and access the Transcript Details of an enrolled user's material.To view users who are enrolled in a material, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Catalog Management > Materials. Then, click the View Users option in the Options column for the appropriate material.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYMaterial Management - View Users XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to view all users who have any version of the material on their transcript. Administrators with this permission can also access the transcript of enrolled users. This permission works in conjunction with the Materials Management permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine for which materials the administrator is able to view users and which users the administrator is able to view on the Enrolled Employees page. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationMaterials Management XE "Course Catalog" Grants ability to view the Material Administration page and create, edit, and copy materials. Once created, these "materials" can be managed like other learning objects via the course catalog. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Provider. The constraints on this permission determine which materials the administrator is able to view, edit, copy, and create. This is an administrator permission. Learning - AdministrationSearch Enrolled UsersThe following search fields and filters are available at the top of the Enrolled Employees table:Search Users by Last Name - Enter the last name of the appropriate user.Version - From the drop-down, select the appropriate material version. This drop-down only displays material versions that are assigned to the enrolled employees.Click Search to update the Enrolled Users table to only display users who match the search criteria.Export Enrolled UsersTo export the table of enrolled users to Excel, click the Export to Excel XE "Document" link in the upper-right corner of the table. All filters that are applied to the Enrolled Users table are also applied within the exported document. Enrolled Users TableBy default, the table is sorted by material version with the highest version numbers displayed first. However, the table can be sorted by Version, Name, or Status by clicking the appropriate column header.The following information is displayed for each enrolled user:Version - This displays the material version number. Name - Because a user can be enrolled in multiple versions, a user may appear in the table multiple times. XE "Organizational Unit" Organizational Unit(s)Status - This displays the user's status for the corresponding material version.View Transcript Details for Enrolled UserTo view the Transcript Details page for a user's material, click the View Transcript icon for the appropriate user and material version. See Training Details - View.BackClick Back to return to the Material Administration page. See Material Administration.Renamed Legacy Forms to Training FormsRenamed Legacy Forms to Training Forms XE "Onboarding" Cornerstone offers two types of forms, forms that are used for training purposes and forms that are used for general purposes and onboarding.Prior to this release, both of these form types utilized a similar nomenclature, which made it difficult to distinguish between the two. XE "Email" With this enhancement, the administration pages related to the training forms are renamed to more clearly indicate that they are specific to training forms. This includes page titles, field names and descriptions, email triggers, and permissions. This enhancement creates a consistent user experience for administrators when managing their new and existing training forms.Use Cases XE "Learning" Sarah is an administrator who works for Acme Corporation. She manages the learning and recruiting, and she frequently uses forms within the system. She is now able to clearly differentiate between the two types of forms that she uses.Considerations XE "Form Management" The email tags associated with training form email triggers are not renamed, as they are also applicable to the other Form Management email triggers.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using the Learning module. XE "Security" SecurityWith this release, the following permissions are renamed and are moved to a new Training Forms Administration category:Forms - Manage - This permission is now titled Training Forms - Manage.Order Forms - Manage - This permission is now titled Training Order Forms - Manage. XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form Custom Fields - Manage - This permission name is unchanged.Training Request Form Administration - This permission is now titled Training Request Form - Manage.These changes will be reflected throughout Online Help when this functionality is released.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form - Manage XE "Request" Grant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form Custom Fields - ManageGrants access to create and edit custom fields used for Training Request Forms. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Email" Email Triggers XE "Form Management" With this enhancement, the Old Form Management email action type is renamed and is now titled Training Form Management.With this enhancement, the following email triggers are renamed: XE "Form" Submit Form - This email trigger is now titled Submit Training Form. XE "Training Form" Form Approved - This email trigger is now titled Training Form Approved.Form Denied - This email trigger is now titled Training Form Denied.Form Task Assigned - This email trigger is now titled Training Form Task Assigned.Form Task Due - This email trigger is now titled Training Form Task Due. XE "Learning" Admin Tools - LearningWith this enhancement, the Training Forms link on the Admin Tools - Learning page is renamed and is now titled Training Form Management.To access the Admin Tools - Learning page, go to Admin > Tools > Learning.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form - Manage XE "Request" Grant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form Custom Fields - ManageGrants access to create and edit custom fields used for Training Request Forms. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Learning" Admin Tools - Learning - Training Form ManagementWith this enhancement, the Training Forms page within Admin Tools is renamed and is now titled Training Form Management.The following links on the Training Form Management page are renamed:Order Forms - This link is now titled Manage Training Order Forms.Training Form Management - This link is now titled Manage Training Forms.Training Request Forms - This link is now titled Manage Training Request Forms.To access the Training Form Management page, go to Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form - Manage XE "Request" Grant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form Custom Fields - ManageGrants access to create and edit custom fields used for Training Request Forms. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Form" Training Form AdministrationWith this enhancement, Training Form Administration is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to administer training forms. XE "Form Management" The page header is renamed from Form Management to Training Form Administration. Note: The page header is only renamed for organizations who currently have the page header set to Form Management.The Search Forms field is renamed and is now titled Search Training Forms.The XE "Template" Create New Form Template link is renamed and is now titled Create New Training Form Template.The Create New Form Task link is renamed and is now titled Create New Training Form Task.The Show Inactive Forms option is renamed and is now titled Show Inactive Training Forms.The table header is renamed from Forms to Training Forms.To access the Training Form Administration page, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Forms.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Form" Training Form Template - CreateWith this enhancement, the Create Training Form page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create training form templates.The page header is renamed from Forms: Create Form to Create Training Form.The header for the Tips section is renamed from Form Structure Tips to Training Form Structure Tips.The Form Details section is renamed and is now titled Training Form Details.The Form Name field is renamed and is now titled Training Form Name.These changes also apply when editing and copying training form templates.To create a training form template, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Forms. Then, click the Create New Training Form Template link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Form" Training Form Task - CreateWith this enhancement, the Define Task page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create training form tasks.The Component XE "Form" field previously displayed "Form." This field now displays "Training Form."These changes also apply when editing and copying training form tasks.To create a training form task, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Forms. Then, click the Create New Training Form Task link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Forms - Manage XE "User" Allows user to create and manage custom training form templates and create and assign training form tasks. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Order Form" Training Order Form AdministrationWith this enhancement, Training Order Form Administration is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to administer training order forms.The page header is renamed from Manage Order Forms to Training Order Form Administration.The Order Form Management section header is renamed and is now titled Manage Training Order Forms.The Order Form Title search field is renamed and is now titled Training Order Form Title.The Create New Order Form link is renamed and is now titled Create New Training Order Form.To access the Training Order Form Administration page, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Order Forms.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Order Form" Training Order Form - CreateWith this enhancement, the Create Training Order Form page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create training order forms.The page header is renamed from Create Order Form to Create Training Order Form.The Order Form Management section header is renamed and is now titled Training Order Form Details.The instructions are updated to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create and manage training order forms.These changes also apply when editing and copying training order forms.To create a training order form, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Order Forms. Then, click the Create New Training Order Form link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Order Form" Training Order Form - ViewWith this enhancement, the View Training Order Form page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is displaying a training order form.The Order Form section header is renamed and is now titled Training Order Form.To create a training order form, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Order Forms. Then, click the View icon for the appropriate training order form.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Order Forms - ManageGrants access to the Manage Order Forms page, which allows administrators to create and manage order forms. The order forms act as promotional purchase pages which are displayed to end users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form AdministrationWith this enhancement, Training Request Form Administration is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to administer training request forms. XE "Request" The page header is renamed from Manage Request Forms to Training Request Form Administration.The XE "Form" Create New Form link is renamed and is now titled Create New Training Request Form.The Manage Custom Fields link is renamed and is now titled Manage Training Request Form Custom Fields.The Manage Form Statuses link is renamed and is now titled Manage Training Request Form Statuses.The Training Request Forms section header is renamed and is now titled Manage Training Request Forms.To access the Training Request Form Administration page, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Request Forms.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Request Form - ManageGrant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form - CreateWith this enhancement, the Create Training Request Form page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create training request forms.The page header is renamed from Training Request Form - Setup to Create Training Request Form.The instructions are updated to more clearly indicate that the page is used to create and manage training request forms.The XE "Request" Request Form Fields section header is renamed and is now titled Training Request Form Custom Fields.The description of the Custom Fields area is updated to more clearly indicate that the custom fields are related to a training request form.These changes also apply when editing training request forms.To create a training request form, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Request Forms. Then, click the Create New Training Request Form link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Request Form - Manage XE "Form" Grant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Training Request Form" Training Request Form Statuses - ManageWith this enhancement, the Manage Training Request Form Status Names pop-up is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to manage training request form status names. XE "Form" The page header is renamed from Manage Form Status Names to Manage Training Request Form Status Names.The instructions are updated to more clearly indicate that the page is used to manage training request form status names.To manage training request form status names, go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Request Forms. Then, click the Manage Training Request Form Statuses link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Request Form - Manage XE "Request" Grant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms Administration XE "Custom Field" Custom Field Administration - Training Request Forms XE "Training Request Form" With this enhancement, the Training Request Form Custom Fields page is enhanced to more clearly indicate that the page is used to manage training request form custom fields. XE "Request" The page header is renamed from Request Form Custom Fields to Training Request Form Custom Fields.The tab on the left is renamed from Request Forms to Training Request Forms.To manage training request form custom fields:Go to XE "Learning" Admin > Tools > Learning > Training Form Management > Manage Training Request Forms. Then, click the Manage Training Request Form Custom Fields link.Go to Admin > Tools > Core Functions > Custom Field Administration. Then, click the Training Request Forms tab on the left.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYTraining Request Form - ManageGrant access to create and edit training request forms, manage request form statuses, and manage form statuses for users. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationTraining Request Form Custom Fields - ManageGrants access to create and edit custom fields used for Training Request Forms. This is an administrator permission.Training Forms AdministrationRoster - Add Users Permission Constraints XE "Provider" With this enhancement, Roster - Add Users permission can now be constrained by ILT Provider and User's ILT Provider. This constraint restricts the sessions to which an administrator or instructor is able to add users. For example, if an instructor is constrained to a particular provider, then the Add Users link is only available to the instructor on sessions that are associated with the constrained provider. XE "Organizational Unit" For the Roster - Add Users permission, if multiple constraints are added and the constraints are all by OU and User's OU, then the constraints utilize OR logic. This means that the user can add users from any of the constrained OUs. If multiple constraints are added and one of the constraints is Provider, then the constraints utilize AND logic. This means that the user can only add users to sessions within the provider constraint, and the user can only add users that belong to any of the constrained OUs.Use Cases XE "Learning" Lauren is a learning administrator who helps to manage several instructors at her company. She has given permission to all of the instructors to allow them to view all of the session rosters. She recently realized that some of the instructors were adding users to the rosters of sessions for providers that were different than the ones they should be managing. She wants to only give permission to instructors to be able to add users to rosters of sessions for specific ILT providers but still allow them to be able to view the session roster. She is able to do this by constraining the permission by ILT Provider.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using Instructor Led Training. XE "Security" SecurityWith this release, the Roster - Add Users permission can now be constrained by ILT Provider and User's ILT Provider. The permission description will be updated with this functionality is released.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRoster - Add UsersGrants ability to add named users to class rosters for instructor led training sessions. This permission works in conjunction with the Roster - View permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Self Registration" Self-Registration Fields EnhancementsSelf-Registration Fields Enhancements OverviewWith this enhancement, the following improvements are made to the Order step when configuring self-registration pages:Address, Country, and Prefix fields can now be included XE "User" Data entered into the new address fields automatically populates the user recordAn option is added for custom fields to use the default and translated valuesPrior to this enhancement, physical address fields were not available to add to self-registration pages. In addition, the default and translated values could not be used for custom fields.Use Case XE "Email" Acme Corporation provides training for sale on a global scale. The administrator for Acme is responsible for setting up the self-registration page. On this page, he includes fields for Name, Email, and Address. He also includes custom fields, such as Special Travel Needs. When users complete the self-registration process, they will have a flawlessly translated experience, regardless of whether or not the self-registration page includes custom fields. In addition, when users complete standard fields, such as Address, the information automatically populates the user record. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Self Registration" Self Registration Groups - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create and update/edit self-registration groups, which are configured to make a self-registration page available to people who are not added to the portal via user feed. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationSelf Registration Groups - View XE "Proxy Enrollment" Grants ability to view Self Registration Groups when selecting availability for training, tasks, proxy enrolls, etc. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationAddress, Country, Prefix Fields XE "Self Registration" With this enhancement, Address, Country, and Prefix fields can now be included on self-registration pages. The data entered into the fields automatically populates the user record.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Self Registration" Self Registration Groups - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to create and update/edit self-registration groups, which are configured to make a self-registration page available to people who are not added to the portal via user feed. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationSelf Registration Groups - View XE "Proxy Enrollment" Grants ability to view Self Registration Groups when selecting availability for training, tasks, proxy enrolls, etc. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationAddressThis field allows users to enter their physical address. When included on the self-registration page, the following fields display for users to complete:Address Line 1Address Line 2CityStateZipIn the configuration options for the field, you can make the field optional or required. You can also select to automatically set the address to the location in the Location XE "Selection" field, which is the default selection for the configuration options.CountryThis field allows users to select their country. The field displays as a drop-down from which users select their country.In the configuration options for the field, you can make the field optional or required. You can also select to automatically set the country to the location in the Location field, which is the default selection for the configuration options.PrefixThis field displays as a text box and allows users to enter a prefix, up to 20 characters. In the configuration options for the field, you can make the field required.Custom FieldsWith this enhancement, a Use default label (including translations) XE "Self Registration" field is added to the Order step when adding custom fields to self-registration pages. When this field is selected, the name of the field displays as the name defined in Custom Field Administration in the default language for the custom field. If any translations have been defined for the field, then the translated value displays for users when completing the self-registration page, if a translated value is available for the user's browser language.This option is selected by default for all newly added custom fields following implementation of this enhancement.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Self Registration" Self Registration Groups - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to create and update/edit self-registration groups, which are configured to make a self-registration page available to people who are not added to the portal via user feed. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationSelf Registration Groups - View XE "Proxy Enrollment" Grants ability to view Self Registration Groups when selecting availability for training, tasks, proxy enrolls, etc. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User's Corporation. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration? XE "Session" Session Roster - Display Additional Information XE "Event" With this enhancement, the Session Roster is enhanced to display the event name at the top of the page and the session start and end date in the session details.At the top of the Session Roster page, the name of the session's associated event is displayed. This enables the instructor or administrator to always be aware of the event for which they are viewing the roster. XE "User" In the session's general information at the top of the roster, the session's start and end date and time are displayed. This enables the instructor or administrator to quickly view additional information for the session. The start and end times are displayed in the user's timezone.ConsiderationsAnytime "All Locator Numbers" is selected from the Locator Number drop-down menu, the Session Start Date and Session End Date fields are not displayed because multiple sessions are displayed.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using Instructor Led Training. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRoster - Manage XE "Provider" Grants ability to manage instructor led training session rosters, including updating attendance, and marking the ILT session complete to update student transcripts. A variety of other features are available depending upon additional roster permissions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View, Sessions - View, and Roster - View permissions. This permission can be constrained by Instructor, User as Instructor, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission. XE "Learning" Learning - AdministrationRoster - ViewGrants view-only access to instructor led training session rosters. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. This permission can be constrained by Instructor, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, and User as Instructor. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Session" Session Roster - Sign-in Sheet EnhancementsThe session roster contains a printable version of the sign-in sheet that clients use to track attendance for instructor led trainings. Clients are able to export the sign-in sheet to Microsoft Excel.With this enhancement, the printed sign-in sheet for a session is enhanced to display additional information and to display existing information more efficiently. XE "Email" The Work Phone and Email Address are now displayed in separate columns on the sign-in sheet.The sign-in sheet now displays the following additional information: XE "User" User ID - This column is displayed to the right of the Registered Attendees column. Note: A backend setting controls whether the User ID is displayed on the session anizational Units - This column is displayed to the right of the User ID column, and it displays the same OUs that are displayed on the session roster. Custom OU types and groups are not displayed.Address - This column is displayed to the right of the Email Address column, and it displays the first line of the user's address.Use Cases XE "Learning" Ashley is a learning administrator who mainly works with events and sessions. She currently uses the Print Sign-In Sheet functionality to print an Excel document that contains information for users who are registered for each session. She uses the sheet to track session attendance for each instructor led training session. She navigates to the Session Roster and clicks Print Sign-In Sheet. The system automatically generates a Microsoft Excel version of the sign-in sheet. The sign-in sheet contains all of the appropriate session information in addition to a table that lists the users' information including First Name, Last Name, User ID, Organizational Units, Work Phone, Email Address, Address, Work City and State, and a space for a Signature. She now has more helpful information on each attendee. ConsiderationsThere are two types of sign-in sheet that can be printed. This enhancement only applies to the expanded sign-in sheet which displays the attendee's name, user ID, OU, work phone, email, address, city, and state.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using Instructor Led Training and the expanded sign-in sheet.This functionality is not available for organizations that are using the non-expanded sign-in sheet. To enable the expanded sign-in sheet, which includes this enhanced functionality, contact Global Product Support. For more information about this functionality, contact your Client Success Manager. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRoster - Manage XE "Provider" Grants ability to manage instructor led training session rosters, including updating attendance, and marking the ILT session complete to update student transcripts. A variety of other features are available depending upon additional roster permissions. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View, Sessions - View, and Roster - View permissions. This permission can be constrained by Instructor, User as Instructor, ILT Provider, and User's ILT Provider. This is an administrator permission.Learning - AdministrationRoster - ViewGrants view-only access to instructor led training session rosters. This permission works in conjunction with Events - View and Sessions - View permissions. This permission can be constrained by Instructor, ILT Provider, User's ILT Provider, and User as Instructor. This is an administrator permission.Learning - Administration XE "Session" Session Start Date Email Trigger - Manager Name XE "Email" With this enhancement, the Session Start Date email trigger is enhanced to support the RECIPIENT.MANAGER.FIRST.NAME and RECIPIENT.MANAGER.LAST.NAME tags. These tags enable administrators to include the name of the registered user's manager in the email.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage, Live, and Pilot portals for all organizations using Instructor Led Training. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGlobal Email Administration - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to manage email trigger templates across all active modules in the portal. Enables creating, editing and deleting email message templates for various system actions and workflows. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User. This is an administrator permission.Core AdministrationTime-out for Online CoursesTime-out for Online Courses XE "SCORM" Prior to this enhancement, the system's timeout functionality was not applied to Online Courses, which enabled users to continue viewing SCORM 2004 and SCORM 1.2 online courses after their portal's session had expired. XE "Session" With this enhancement, if a user is completing an online course and their login session is about to expire, the user is now notified. The user is also given the option to continue their login session. If the user does not choose to continue the login session, then the system ends the user's session.This enhancement helps to improve the accuracy of training hours and to prevent users from losing their training progress.WorkflowUse CasesJennifer is an employee at a healthcare organization, and she needs to complete the First Aid Awareness course. When Jennifer opens the course, the system activates a timer based on the portal's timeout configuration. When Jennifer's session is about to expire, a Timeout notification appears. Jennifer chooses to continue the course, and the system resets the timeout timer.Mike is an employee at a retail company. Every week, he needs to complete the Weekly Sales course. Mike opens the course and begins the training. After a few minutes, he receives a message from his manager, asking him to update some details on the store's website. Mike opens the store's website and leaves the course open. When Mike's session is about to expire, the Timeout notification appears. Mike does not respond to the notification, so the system saves Mike's progress and ends the session. When Mike navigates back to the course, the Session Expired message is displayed. Mike closes the course and can re-launch the course if he wants to continue.ConsiderationsThis functionality only impacts SCORM 2004 and SCORM 1.2 courses. AICC courses are not impacted by this enhancement.Implementation XE "Learning" Upon release, this functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Learning module.The timeout duration is based on an existing backend setting, which is used to automatically log a user out of the system if they are idle for the specified duration of time.Online Course Time-out Messages XE "User" When a user is completing an online course, the system initiates a timer that is based on the portal's timeout configuration. The purpose of this timer is to warn users when their login session is about to expire and to provide the user with the option to remain active in the portal. XE "Session" When the user's session is about to expire, the system displays a warning message. If the user chooses to continue their session, then the timer is reset. The user can continue completing their training and remain logged in to the system. If the user chooses not to continue their session or if they do not respond to the warning message, then the system saves the user's progress and ends their session. The system displays a message to inform the user that their session is expired.Defect Fix February 2016 ReleaseThe following is the defect that has been fixed as part of the February '16 release:ReportDefectFixRecords ReportThe Records Report automatically included removed training. This training was not identified as removed in the report, and the report options did not include a field to exclude the removed training.A Removed Training XE "User" option is added to the Records Report. This option is unchecked by default. When checked, the report output includes training that was removed from a user's transcript. The report output also includes a new "Removed" column that identifies removed training.If the Removed Training option is not selected, then training that has been removed and the "Removed" column do not display in the report output. XE "Mobile" MobileMobile Redesign Auto-Upgrade (New UX) XE "App" With the February '16 release, the mobile app is redesigned to provide users with a modern and vibrant interface. While there are no functionality or feature changes with this enhancement, the interface is designed to deliver a more consumerized experience to generate users.Operating SystemsThe redesign applies to the following operating systems:iOS 8Android 4.4+ XE "Team" TeamThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.AboutThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.Checklists and NotesThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image petenciesThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style. XE "Curricula" CurriculumThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style. XE "Applicant" ApplicantThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.RequisitionsThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style. XE "Transcript" TranscriptThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.Training DetailsThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.Header BarThe header bar, which displays the menu button and page name, is redesigned Header ButtonsThe header buttons are updated to images only that display in color.ApprovalsThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, header, and image style.Approval DetailsThe display for the approval Details pages for goals, job requisitions, and training is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style.Goal Targets and TasksThe display for goal targets and tasks is redesigned to update the colors, background, and image style. Mobile Enabled Online CoursesFor all online courses that are enabled for mobile, a mobile icon displays to the right of the course information.Do You Know GameThe display is redesigned to update the colors, background, header, and image style. XE "Mobile" Mobile - Retire Support for Android 4.3 and iOS 7.0With the February '16 release, support for older Android and iOS operating systems will be retired. The following operating systems will be supported following the February '16 release: Android – Only 4.4 and above will be supportedApple (iOS) – Only 8.0 and above will be supportedOnline Course External Links and DocumentsOnline Course External Links and Documents Overview XE "App" Android and iOS users are now able to access external links and documents from their online courses. When the link or document is closed, users are returned directly to the course without having to re-open the app.ConsiderationsFor iOS 9 users, external links that are configured to open in a new window and not using HTTPS are not compatible with this enhancement, and the link will not open. We recommend that administrators create courses with secure protocol.Open External Links and Documents XE "App" Android and iOS users are now able to access external links and documents from their online courses. In addition, when the link or document is closed, users are returned directly to the course without having to re-open the patible File Types for DocumentsThe following file types can be opened in online courses, provided that the user's device supports the file type:.bmp.doc.dot.dotx.gif.htm.html.jpeg.jpg.m4v.mp3.mp4.pdf.png.ppsx.ppt.pptx.txt.xls.xlsx.wavAccessing Links Offline XE "Connection" External links in online courses cannot be accessed offline. An error message displays indicating that users can retry the link when they have an Internet connection. XE "Performance" PerformanceGoals RedesignGoals Redesign Overview XE "User" With this enhancement, the Goals functionality is redesigned. The entire end user experience and pages are redesigned for a stronger and more seamless process. Pages have been consolidated and pop-ups eliminated for a more efficient and effective goal creation, tracking, and management. Alignment options are displayed to reduce confusion and increase transparency. Tasks and Targets are created and grouped into a single section to more closely align with how they are created and tracked. The My Goals page displays all goals that relate to you with dynamic filtering options to display Manager, Division, and Company goals on the same page. ConsiderationsWhen enabled, the new design applies to both new and in progress goals. XE "Library" The Administrative pages like Goals Preferences, Configuration, Library, and Perspectives/Categories are not changed. Also, Goal Approval pages are not changed.The SMART Goals Wizard is not included in the February 2016 Release.Because the goal creation process has changed, it is important that the directions that are customized in the Goal Creation Administration section of the Goals Configuration page are updated to reflect the new process.ImplementationUpon release, this functionality is automatically enabled in Stage portals. This functionality is automatically disabled in Pilot and Production portals. To enable this functionality, contact Global Product Support. For more information about this functionality, contact your Client Success Manager.All organizations using the Goals functionality will be automatically upgraded with the April 2016 Release. XE "Security" Security XE "Relationship" With this release, the Goals - Create permission is enhanced and can now be constrained by Custom Relationship. This permission description will be updated when this functionality is released.PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCompany Goals - CreateGrants access to create goals that appear to all users as "company goals." This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationEmployee Goals - CreateAllow user to Create Goals for other employees (other than self and subordinates). The constraints on this permission determine with which employees a user can align their goals. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationGoal ConfigurationGrants ability to manage Goal Configuration, which enables configuration of goal fields as well as goal statuses. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationGoals - Dynamic Assignment OptionGrants ability to specify a goal as dynamically assigned, when assigning the goal to a population of users. If a goal is dynamically assigned, users who later meet the criteria will receive the goal. PerformanceManage Shared and Dynamic GoalsGrants ability to turn off the dynamic behavior and edit a dynamic goal from the Edit Goals page. The administrator or manager can only view and edit goals created by users that exist within the OU constraints set for this permission.PerformanceOU Goals - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create and assign goals to all users within a selected organizational unit or group. This is an administrator permission.The constraints on this permission overwrite the constraints on the Goals - Create permission. That is, if a user has both permissions, then the constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission are applied.Performance - Administration XE "Snapshot" Snapshot - Goals XE "Universal Profile" Enables user to view the Goals widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfileGoals - Create Permission Constraints XE "Relationship" With this enhancement, the Goals - Create permission can now be constrained by Custom Relationship. This permission constraint allows custom relationships, such as dotted-line managers, to create goals for users. XE "Organizational Unit" The constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission overwrite the constraints on the Goals - Create permission. That is, if a user has both permissions, then the constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission are applied.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "User" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission. XE "Performance" PerformanceOU Goals - Create XE "Assign" Grants ability to create and assign goals to all users within a selected organizational unit or group. This is an administrator permission.The constraints on this permission overwrite the constraints on the Goals - Create permission. That is, if a user has both permissions, then the constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission are applied.Performance - AdministrationGoals Configuration - Goal Creation AdministrationThe Goal Creation Administration section of the Goals Configuration page enables administrators to configure the instruction text that appears when aligning, setting, and assigning a goal. Prior to this enhancement, the Align, Set, and Assign functionality existed on separate pages, and the directions appeared at the top of each page.With this enhancement, goals are now created on a single page, and the page labels in the Goal Creation Administration section have been updated.Because the goal creation process has changed, it is important that these directions are updated to reflect the new process.The directions that are defined in Goals Configuration are now displayed in the following areas:The Align page is now labeled Alignment. These directions are displayed at the top of the Alignment pop-up. See Goal - Align with Another Goal PAGEREF _Ref-254661365 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 293 for additional information.The Set page is now labeled Create and Edit. These directions are displayed at the top of the Create Goal page. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.The Assign page is now labeled Assignment. These directions are displayed at the top of the Assignment section on the Create Goal page. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.To modify Goals Configuration, go to XE "Performance" Admin > Tools > Performance Management > Goals Configuration.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoal Configuration XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to manage Goal Configuration, which enables configuration of goal fields as well as goal statuses. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationView Goals - My GoalsWith this enhancement, the appearance of the My Goals page is enhanced. In addition, the ability to view and manage goals is more convenient and intuitive. This includes editing goals, viewing goal details, adding attachments and comments to goals, and updating the progress of goals.The My Goals page contains all of your goals including goals you have created and goals that have been assigned to you. Shared goals also appear on this page. From the My Goals page, users can view goal details, edit goals, adding attachments and comments to goals, and updating goal progress.To view the My Goals page, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals.Note: Field names may be customizable by the system administrator, so your field names may vary. PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCompany Goals - CreateGrants access to create goals that appear to all users as "company goals." This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationView Goals XE "Role" Grants ability to view own goals and (depending on role and settings) goals of others (manager's visible goals, direct subordinate's goals, company goals, division goals). This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceCreate GoalTo create a new goal, click the Create button in the upper-right corner of the page. This option is only available if you have permission to create a goal. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.OptionsThe following options are available in the Options drop-down menu:Download PDF - My Goals XE "Document" - Select this option to export your goals to a PDF document. This option is only available if you have available goals.Download PDF - Division Goals - Select this option to export all visible division goals to a PDF document. This option is only available if you have available division goals.Search and Filter GoalsUse the filters to determine which goals are displayed.Use the date filters to select a specific time period. Then, click the Search button to update the display. If any part of a goal falls within that time frame, the goal will display. The following date filters are available:Goal Period - From the drop-down menu, select a defined date range.Date Range - Using the Calendar tools, select a specific start date and end date.Use the status filters to determine which goals are displayed. The following status filters are available:Display Cancelled - Select this option to display goals that have been cancelled. By default, cancelled goals are not displayed.Hide Completed - Select this option to hide goals that have been completed. By default, all active goals are displayed, including Completed goals. However, you may want to hide Completed goals so that the page only displays goals that are still in progress. This allows you to view all of the goal progress that has not yet been completed. XE "Approval" Send Approval RequestThe XE "Request" Send Approval Request XE "Email" button is available in the upper-right corner of the page if you have goals that are pending approval. Click this button to send an email to your goal approver if the Request Goal Approval email is enabled. Once the request is sent, the button text is updated to "Request Sent" until the page is refreshed.If goal approval is not required or if a goal approver is not set, then goals are automatically approved when they are created, edited, or cancelled.EmailsEMAIL NAMEEMAIL DESCRIPTIONACTION TYPERequest Goal ApprovalThis email is a batch type email that includes a notification for each situation in which a goal owner does the following:Creates and submits a goal for themselves when approval is required. Edits and resubmits a goal that has already been approved.Attempts to cancel a goal that has been approved when approval is required.This email is triggered when a user clicks the Send Approval Request button on the My Goals screen.The email is sent to the user in the Approver role. If no approver is set or if goal approval is not required, the goal is automatically approved and no email is sent.The email can contain a link to the Pending Goals page.Performance ManagementMy Goals/Manager's Goals/Division Goals/Company GoalsThe options at the top of the page determine which goals are displayed on the page. The options display the number of goals that are available in each section. To hide a type of goal, unselect the appropriate option.The following options may be available:My Goals - This option is selected by default when the My Goals page is opened. When this button is selected, the My Goals section appears on the page, which displays all of your goals that fall within the defined goal period.Manager's Goals - Select this option to view any visible goals that have been set for your manager. This adds the Manager's Goals section to the page which displays your manager's goals that are visible and that fall within the defined goal period. You can view the overall progress and details of each goal. If your manager does not have any goals that are visible within the specified time frame, then this option is not available.Division Goals - Select this option to view any goals that have been set for your division. This adds the Division Goals section to the page which displays division goals that fall within the defined goal period. You can view the overall progress and details of each division goal. If the division does not have any goals within the specified time frame, then this option is not pany Goals - Select this option to view any goals that have been set for your organization. This adds the Company Goals section to the page which displays company goals that fall within the defined goal period. You can view the overall progress and details of each company goal. If the company does not have any goals within the specified time frame, then this option is not available.Note: If there are no manager, division, or company goals available, then the My Goals option is hidden. Goal SummaryTo view the full details for a goal, either click the goal title or the Right arrow to the right of the goal.To hide a goal's details, either click the goal title or the Down arrow .Goals are listed in alphabetical order by title. The following information may be displayed for each goal:Progress - This indicates the goal's progress as a percentage. The color of the progress bar is determined by the goal status. Users may have the option to update goal progress using a progress slider. The goal progress is automatically saved as the progress slider is moved. The goal progress slider is only available if the following is true:Administrators have enabled goal progress to be displayed. If goal progress is not displayed, then users are not able to update goal progress.Administrators have prevented goal progress from exceeding 100%. If goal progress is allowed to exceed 100%, then goal progress is updated via a Progress field above the Description field.The goal does not contain tasks or targets. If the goal contains tasks or targets, then goal progress is updated by updating the progress of the task or target.The goal is not in Draft status.Title - If the goal is a shared goal, an asterisk appears before the goal title. Status - This indicates the overall standing of the goal. This can be determined by goal, task, and target progress and can also factor in the amount of time remaining for completion. The status is also reflected in the progress color. For example, if a user has satisfied a goal, the Status will be Completed and the progress bar may be blue. The names, colors, and the criteria for each status can be modified by the system administrator.Due DateWeight - The goal weight is used to prioritize goals and place additional value on certain goals.Perspective - The perspective is used to specify to which aspect of the company the goal relates.Aligned To - This displays the owner of the goal to which the direct report's goal is aligned. This only displays if the goal is aligned to another goal.Owner - For shared goals, this displays the name of the goal owner. This is only displayed for division and company goals.Note: Perspective, Weight, Status, and Progress can be disabled by the system administrator. If they are disabled, the fields will not appear. For all fields except the Weight field, the field name is configurable by the administrator. As a result, fields may be named differently in your portal. Further, some fields can be configured to not display.Manage GoalTo update goal progress, add comments or attachments to a goal, or view goal details, click the goal title or click the Right arrow to the right of the goal. See Goal - Manage PAGEREF _Ref-1365074750 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 307 for additional information.You are only able to manage goals for which you are the owner, including division and company goals. Clicking the title of a shared goal opens a read-only version of the goal. Note: Only users with permission to create company goals can update the progress of a company goal and add attachments to a company goal.Goal ActionsUsers may have access to the following actions from the Options drop-down menu to the right of the goal summary:Edit - Select this option to edit the goal. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator and the goal is not locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Copy - Select this option to copy the goal. All of the goal details are copied to the new goal except for the Assignment, Alignment, Attachments, and Comments. Also, the Start Date and End Date are set to the default values. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is not expired. Also, this option is not available if the goal is locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Cancel - Select this option to cancel the goal. A confirmation pop-up opens to confirm the cancellation. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator. Also, this option is only available for unlocked, non-draft goals.If cancellation approval is not required, then the goal's status becomes Canceled.If cancellation approval is required, then the goal's status becomes Pending Cancellation Approval, and the Request Goal Approval email is triggered if it is enabled.Delete - Select this option to delete the goal. This option is only available for unlocked goals in Draft status.Advance - Select this option for an expired goal to copy the details of the goal and set the Start Date and End Date to the next goal period. The goal progress is reset for the new goal. For example, if the expired goal had a start and end date of 01/01/15-12/31/15, once you advance the goal, the new start and end date will be 01/01/16-12/31/16 and the goal progress is set to zero. This action is intended to help save time creating goals for the new goal period if they are similar to the previous period. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is expired. Also, this option is not available if goals are locked.Align - This option may be available for manager, division, and company goals. This option is only available if alignment is enabled, the goal is available for alignment, and if the goal is unlocked. If available, you can select this option to create a new goal that is aligned with the goal. This creates a new goal that is aligned with the goal, and all of the goal information copied into your goal. There, you can edit the details of the goal. Tasks and targets may be copied to your goal depending on the preferences set by your system administrator. The alignment of the goal can be edited before the goal is saved. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.View History - Select this option to view the history of the goal. The name of the user who updated the goal is included with the type of update and the date and time of the update. See Goal - View History PAGEREF _Ref-1038919190 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 313 for additional information.For a company goal, the Edit, Cancel, and Delete options are only available if the user has permission to create company goals.For a shared goal, the Edit, Cancel, and Delete options are only available to the goal manager. XE "Team" View Goals - Team GoalsThe Team Goals page enables managers to view their direct reports, their overall goal progress, and their goal details. Depending on the system configuration, managers may be able to perform actions on their direct reports' goals, such as editing goals and updating goal progress.To view the Team Goals page, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then, click the Team Goals tab. If you have no direct reports or if you do not have permission to view your direct reports' goals, then the Team Goals page is not available.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "User" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceView Goals XE "Role" Grants ability to view own goals and (depending on role and settings) goals of others (manager's visible goals, direct subordinate's goals, company goals, division goals). This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceCreate GoalTo create a new goal, click the Create button in the upper-right corner of the page. This option is only available if you have permission to create a goal. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.OptionsThe following options are available in the Options drop-down menu:Download PDF XE "Document" - Select this option to export the Team Goals page to a PDF document. This option only exports the goals that are currently displayed. If you have not expanded any direct reports to view their goals, then this option is not available because no goals are currently displayed. Similarly, if you expand one direct report, then only the goals of that direct report are included in the PDF.Search and Filter GoalsUse the filters to determine which goals are displayed.Use the date filters to select a specific time period. Then, click the Search button to update the display. If any part of a goal falls within that time frame, the goal will display. The following date filters are available:Goal Period - From the drop-down menu, select a defined date range.Date Range - Using the Calendar tools, select a specific start date and end date.Use the status filters to determine which goals are displayed. The following status filters are available:Display Cancelled - Select this option to display goals that have been cancelled. By default, cancelled goals are not displayed. Note: Cancelled goals do not count towards the user's overall completion percentage.Hide Completed - Select this option to hide goals that have been completed. By default, all active goals are displayed, including Completed goals. However, you may want to hide Completed goals so that the page only displays goals that are still in progress. This allows you to view all of the goal progress that has not yet been completed. Note: If all of a user's goals are Completed, then the user is not displayed when this option is selected.Status - From the drop-down, select a specific goal status to only display goals that are in a specific status. By default, goals in all active statuses are displayed. This allows you to view goals with a specific completion status, such as Behind Schedule.Goal Summary XE "Universal Profile" Each employee is displayed with their overall goal progress. Click the user's name to view their Universal Profile - Bio. XE "Bio" See Universal Profile - Bio Overview.To view a user's goals, click the Right arrow to the right of the user's overall goal progress. Goals in DRAFT status are not displayed.To hide a goal's hierarchy, either click the goal title or the Down arrow .Users are listed in alphabetical order by first name, then last name. The following information may be displayed for each goal:Progress - This indicates the goal's progress as a percentage. The color of the progress bar is determined by the goal status. Users may have the option to update goal progress using a progress slider. The goal progress is automatically saved as the progress slider is moved. The goal progress slider is only available if the following is true:Administrators have enabled goal progress to be displayed. If goal progress is not displayed, then users are not able to update goal progress.Administrators have prevented goal progress from exceeding 100%. If goal progress is allowed to exceed 100%, then goal progress is updated via a Progress field above the Description field.The goal does not contain tasks or targets. If the goal contains tasks or targets, then goal progress is updated by updating the progress of the task or target.The goal is not in Draft status.Title - If the goal is a shared goal, an asterisk appears before the goal title. Status - This indicates the overall standing of the goal. This can be determined by goal, task, and target progress and can also factor in the amount of time remaining for completion. The status is also reflected in the progress color. For example, if a user has satisfied a goal, the Status will be Completed and the progress bar may be blue. The names, colors, and the criteria for each status can be modified by the system administrator.Due DateWeight - The goal weight is used to prioritize goals and place additional value on certain goals.Perspective - The perspective is used to specify to which aspect of the company the goal relates.Aligned To - This displays the owner of the goal to which the direct report's goal is aligned. This only displays if the goal is aligned to another goal.Note: For all fields except the Weight field, the field name is configurable by the administrator. As a result, fields may be named differently in your portal. Further, some fields can be configured to not display.Lock Goal ResultsDepending on the configuration of the portal, a Lock icon may appear to the right of a direct report's goal. Managers can click this icon to lock or unlock the goal. The following statuses are available:Locked XE "Performance Review" - This indicates that the goal is locked. Users cannot update the goal progress or edit the goal. Managers may lock a goal at the end of the goal period or at the beginning of a review period. This prevents any miscommunication between the manager and employee. Click this icon to unlock the goal.Unlocked - This indicates that the goal is unlocked. Users can update the goal progress and edit the goal. Click this icon to lock the goal.Manage GoalTo update goal progress, add comments or attachments to a goal, or view goal details, click the goal title or click the Right arrow to the right of the goal. See Goal - Manage.A manager cannot update a team member's goal if the goal is locked or if the goal is a shared goal and the manager is not the goal manager.Goal ActionsManagers may have access to the following actions from the Options drop-down menu to the right of the goal:Edit - Select this option to edit the user's goal. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator and the goal is not locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Shared goals cannot be edited by anyone other than the goal owner. Copy - Select this option to copy the user's goal. All of the goal details are copied to the new goal except for the Assignment, Alignment, Attachments, and Comments. Also, the Start Date and End Date are set to the default values. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is not expired. Also, this option is not available if goals are locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Cancel - Select this option to cancel the user's goal. A confirmation pop-up opens to confirm the cancellation. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator and if goals are not locked. XE "Approval" If cancellation approval is not required, then the goal's status becomes Canceled. XE "Request" If cancellation approval is required, then the goal's status becomes Pending Cancellation Approval, and the Request Goal Approval email is triggered if it is enabled.Shared goals cannot be canceled by anyone other than the goal owner.Advance - Select this option for an expired goal to copy the details of the goal and set the Start Date and End Date to the next goal period. The goal progress is reset for the new goal. For example, if the expired goal had a start and end date of 01/01/15-12/31/15, once you advance the goal, the new start and end date will be 01/01/16-12/31/16 and the goal progress is set to zero. This action is intended to help save time creating goals for the new goal period if they are similar to the previous period. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is expired. Also, this option is not available if goals are locked.View History - Select this option to view the history of the goal. The name of the user who updated the goal is included with the type of update and the date and time of the update. See Goal - View History PAGEREF _Ref-1038919190 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 313 for additional information.View Goals - Hierarchy XE "User" The Hierarchy page gives a visual representation of the user's goals and where they fit into the overall corporate strategy. For each goal, users can see to which goals it is aligned and all of the other goals that have aligned with it. To view the Hierarchy page, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then, click the Hierarchy tab. This tab is not available if the Hierarchy page is disabled or if alignment is disabled.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceCreate GoalTo create a new goal, click the Create button in the upper-right corner of the page. This option is only available if you have permission to create a goal. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref1674361219 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.OptionsThe following options are available in the Options drop-down menu:Download PDF XE "Document" - Select this option to export your entire goal hierarchy to a PDF document.Search GoalsUse the filters to determine which goals are displayed.Use the date filters to select a specific time period. Then, click the Search button to update the display. If any part of a goal falls within that time frame, the goal will display. The following date filters are available:Goal Period - From the drop-down menu, select a defined date range.Date Range - Using the Calendar tools, select a specific start date and end date.View Goal HierarchyInitially, you will only see your own goals regardless of whether or not they are aligned. If your goal is aligned with at least one other goal, a Right arrow appears to the right of the goal's status. Either click the goal title or the Right arrow to view full hierarchy of the goal. The title of your goal is bold so that it is more easily identified. Goals are indented to indicate their level in the goal hierarchy. All goals that appear with the same indentation are at the same level in the hierarchy. In the hierarchy, the goal that appears directly above yours is the goal to which you aligned your goal. Goals that appear below yours are goals that have been aligned to your goal.To hide a goal's hierarchy, either click the goal title or the Down arrow .The following information is displayed for each goal in the hierarchy:Title - If the goal is aligned with at least one other goal, then you can click the goal title to view the full goal hierarchy. If the goal is not aligned with any other goals, then the title is not a hyperlink. XE "Universal Profile" Owner - This displays the goal owner. Click the owner's name to view their Universal Profile - Bio. XE "Bio" See Universal Profile - Bio Overview.Due DateStatus - This displays the goal's current status. The status text is displayed in the color that is associated with the goal status. Goal status can be determined by goal, task, and target progress and can also factor in the amount of time remaining for completion. It is used to indicate the overall standing of the goal. These settings are determined by the preferences set by the system administrator. XE "Goal" Goal - Create/EditGoal - Create/Edit XE "User" Prior to this enhancement, goals were created in a process that contained up to three steps, depending on the configuration of the goals functionality and the permissions of the user.With this enhancement, goals are now created on a single page. This provides a more simple and intuitive process when creating and editing goals. The following changes have been made to the Create Goals page:The option to create a goal using the SMART Wizard is not available because the SMART Wizard is not currently supported by the redesigned Goals functionality.Tasks and Targets are now created and displayed in the same area.The functionality of goals and goal fields is unchanged.Goals are used to identify and formalize the achievements that you want to accomplish during a specific period of time. Goals help you to maintain focus on the correct priorities, and they allow you to track your progress towards the completion of those priorities.The instructions at the top of the page are configured by the administrator in Goals Configuration Preferences.To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCreate Employee Goals - Align XE "Organizational Unit" When creating a goal for users other than self or subordinates, this permission allows administrators to align the goal with other goals. The constraints on this permission determine with which employees the administrator can align the goal. This permission works in conjunction with the Create Employee Goals permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceConsiderations XE "Goals Library" When creating or editing a goal that is imported from a data feed, created from the Goals Library, or assigned as a non-shared goal, if a field is set as read-only, the field cannot be modified by the user. Text and date fields such as Title and Due Date cannot be modified. Tasks and Targets cannot be added. The Alignment section cannot be modified.If the Start or Due Date is set as read-only, the goal cannot be advanced and the Advance option is not available on the My Goals page. XE "Library" If the Goals Library is not enabled, the Library button not visible.If Start Date, Due Date, Perspective, Categories, Weight, or Visibility are not enabled, these options are not visible. If Start Date is not enabled, it defaults to the creation date.If Success Descriptors are not enabled, the Success Descriptors section is not visible.If Tasks, Targets, or Attachments are not enabled, these sections are not visible.LibraryIf the Goals Library is enabled, you can click the Library XE "Template" button in the upper-right corner of the page to create a goal using a predefined goal template. See Goal - Create from Goal Library PAGEREF _Ref-2067503715 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 291 for additional information.When editing a goal, the Library button is not available.Note: When a goal is imported from the Goal Library, some fields may be locked, and you cannot edit these fields. If this occurs, the field is disabled on the Create/Edit Goal page.OptionsWhen editing a goal, the following options are available in the Options drop-down menu:View History - Select this option to view the history of the goal. The name of the user who updated the goal is included with the type of update and the date and time of the update. See Goal - View History PAGEREF _Ref-1038919190 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 313 for additional information. AlignmentIf goal alignment is enabled, the Alignment widget is available in the upper-right corner of the page. XE "Team" Aligning your goal with another goal indicates that your goal directly supports and contributes towards the success of that parent goal. Goal alignment ensures that all employees in a team, division, or company are working to achieve similar goals, and allows employees to see how their efforts contribute to the overall success of the company by creating a hierarchy of goals.When you align to a goal, tasks and targets may be copied to your goal depending on the preferences set by your system administrator. These details can then be modified to be made more appropriate for each user.To align your goal with another goal, click the Align Goal button within the Alignment widget. See Goal - Align with Another Goal PAGEREF _Ref-254661365 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 293 for additional information.If your goal is aligned with another goal, the Alignment widget displays the alignment hierarchy of the goal. For example, if my goal is aligned to my manager's goal, then my manager's goal is displayed above my goal with a connecting line to my goal. The goal's title is displayed, and the color bar on the left of the goal card indicates the goal's status at the time the page is loaded. Users can hover the computer cursor over the goal card to view the goal title and status.Up to three goals are displayed in the widget. For example, if my goal is aligned with my manager's goal, and my manager's goal is aligned with my indirect manager's goal, then these three goals are all displayed in the widget.To edit the goal alignment, click the Edit link above the Alignment widget. This opens the Alignment pop-up. See Goal - Align with Another Goal PAGEREF _Ref-254661365 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 293 for additional information.Note: Any modifications to a goal's alignment are not saved until the goal is saved. General DetailsEnter the following general information for the goal:Title - Enter the title for your goal that will appear on the My Goals page as well as anywhere else your goal is visible. This field is limited to 1,000 characters.Description - Enter an overview of the goal, including any objectives or parameters. This field can be formatted using the text formatting buttons and is limited to 10,000 characters.Start Date and Due Date - Click the Calendar icon to select the date on which the goal should be started and the date by which the goal should be completed. The Start Date must be before the goal Due Date. If this goal is being aligned to another goal, these dates must be within the Start and Due Date of the parent goal. When you view your goals or run goal related reports, the Start Date and Due Date are used to determine which goals are included. If any part of a goal falls within the specified time frame, the goal will display.Weight XE "Performance Review" - Enter a weight for your goal between 0 and 100. Weighting allows you to place a greater value on certain goals. For example, if you have four goals for a review period and they are valued equally, you should assign them each a weight of 25%. Similarly, if one goal is more important than the others, you may give that goal a weight of 40% and assign the other three a weight of 20%. The heavier weighted goal will count more towards your overall goal progress than the other three. Depending on a backend setting, the weight percentage field may accept up to two decimal places.Perspective - From the drop-down menu, select a perspective. The perspective is used to specify to which aspect of the organization your goal relates. A goal can only be associated with one perspective. Perspectives are defined by system administrators.Category - From the drop-down menu, select all categories that are appropriate for your goal. Categories are used to further define the type of goal you are creating. A goal can have multiple categories. Categories are defined by system administrators.Success Descriptors - Success descriptors allow you to define how you deem success in relation to the goal. Click the Manage button to customize the success descriptors for the goal. Note: The term "Success Descriptors" can be customized by the administrator, so the link may appear differently in your portal. See Goal - Manage Success Descriptors PAGEREF _Ref-275764502 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 305 for additional information.Task and TargetsTasks and targets enable users to break down the different steps that are needed to accomplish the goal and to make the goal more clear to the user's performance manager. To add a task or target to the goal, click the Add Tasks or Targets button. See Goal - Create/Edit - Add Tasks or Targets PAGEREF _Ref-525142938 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 286 for additional information.Once tasks and targets are added to a goal, they are displayed in the Tasks and Targets section. The Weight field displays the weight that was entered when the task or target was created. However, you can continue to update the weight of each task and target until the goal is saved. The total weight of all tasks and targets is displayed in the upper-right corner of the Tasks and Targets section. When the goal is saved, the total weight must be equal to 100%. To edit a task or target, click Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate task or target and select Edit.To delete a task or target, click Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate task or target and select Delete. A task or target is not permanently deleted until the goal is saved.AttachmentsYou can attach any documents that are relevant to the goal. This enables you to include more details or references that support the goal so that anyone viewing the goal can view the resources if they are evaluating or aligning to the goal.Up to three attachments can be added to a goal. The maximum file size is 1 MB.Attachments can be avi, bmp, csv, doc, docx, gif, jpg, jpeg, jpe, mov, pdf, png, ppt, pptx, txt, xls, xlsx, and zip. You can attach a file by dragging and dropping a file into the Attachment area. You can also attach a file by clicking the Choose File button and select a file from your computer. Note: The drag-and-drop functionality is not supported by Internet Explorer browsers.After the file is attached, the attachment appears in the Attachments section.An attachment can be removed by clicking the Cancel icon to the right of the attachment name.VisibilitySelect this option to allow other users to see your goal and align their goals with it. This is generally used by managers to allow their direct reports to view manager goals and align their individual goals with them, but other users can use this function if the system administrator allows all users to align with each other. If alignment is disabled, this option is not available.Assignment XE "Organizational Unit" When creating a goal, managers and administrators with the appropriate permissions are able to create a goal and assign it to members of their team, to the entire organization, to an organizational unit (OU) or group, or to specific users. If the Assignment section is not available when creating a goal, then the goal is automatically assigned to the user who is creating the goal.When editing a goal, the Assignment section is not available. However, users can edit the goal manager for goals which they created.Yourself - Select this option to assign the goal to yourself. This option is selected by default. When the goal is approved, this goal will appear in the My Goals section of the My Goals page where you can edit and manage it. This goal may also appear in your performance review.Your Team - Select this option to assign the goal to members of your team. See Goal - Assign to Your Team PAGEREF _Ref-1191848167 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 297 for additional information. XE "Group" Custom Assignment - Select this option to assign the goal to the entire organization, to an OU or group, or to specific users. See Goal - Assign to Custom Assignment PAGEREF _Ref1280270639 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 301 for additional information.The instructions at the top of this section are configured by the administrator in Goals Configuration mentsWhen editing a goal, the Comments section may be available. This section is not available when creating a goal.If the Comments section is enabled, it allows you and your manager to add comments related to all aspects of your goal. For example, you may add a comment to explain your recent efforts toward this goal. You manager can then reply to your comments or they can add an unrelated comment. Comments are displayed with the user's profile picture and a timestamp. The three most recent comments are displayed by default, including replies to those comments. In order to view any additional comments, click the Show previous ment ActionsTo add a new comment, click the Add Comment link. This adds a field in which you can add your comment. After entering your comment, click Add to add the comment to the goal.To reply to a comment, click the Reply icon below the comment. This adds a field in which you can add your reply. After entering your reply, click Reply to add the reply to the comment.To delete a comment you have added, select Delete from the Options drop-down menu . You can delete any comments that you have added.To edit a comment you have added, select Edit from the Options drop-down menu .Submit/Save as Draft/CancelClick Submit XE "Approval" to create the goal or to submit any modifications. When a goal is submitted, the goal status is Pending Approval, and you must click the XE "Request" Send Approval Request XE "Snapshot" button on the My Goals or Snapshot Goals page to send an email to the approver (if the corresponding email is active). If goal approval is not required or if a goal approver is not set, your goal is automatically approved.Click Save as Draft to save the goal without submitting it. The goal will be saved for you to continue creating later, but the goal will not be submitted and will not be visible to anyone but yourself. If the goal is configured to be assigned to another user, the goal is not yet assigned. The goal is only assigned once it is submitted.When saving a goal as a draft, the Title and Weight fields are required.Click Cancel to cancel the goal creation process. When editing a goal, this discards any unsaved changes.Send Approval RequestThe Send Approval Request XE "Email" button is available in the upper-right corner of the page if you have goals that are pending approval. Click this button to send an email to your goal approver if the Request Goal Approval email is enabled. Once the request is sent, the button text is updated to "Request Sent" until the page is refreshed.If goal approval is not required or if a goal approver is not set, then goals are automatically approved when they are created, edited, or cancelled.EmailsEMAIL NAMEEMAIL DESCRIPTIONACTION TYPERequest Goal ApprovalThis email is a batch type email that includes a notification for each situation in which a goal owner does the following:Creates and submits a goal for themselves when approval is required. Edits and resubmits a goal that has already been approved.Attempts to cancel a goal that has been approved when approval is required.This email is triggered when a user clicks the Send Approval Request button on the My Goals screen. XE "Role" The email is sent to the user in the Approver role. If no approver is set or if goal approval is not required, the goal is automatically approved and no email is sent.The email can contain a link to the Pending Goals page.Performance Management XE "Goal" Goal - Create/Edit - Add Tasks or TargetsPrior to this enhancement, tasks and targets were added to the goal on the Set step, and there was a separate section for tasks and targets. In addition, there was a separate process for creating a task versus creating a target, which required users to clearly understand the functional differences between a task and a target.With this enhancement, tasks and targets are added on the Create Goal page, and tasks and targets are displayed in the Tasks & Targets section. Tasks and targets are both created using the new Add Task or Target pop-up, which enables users to intuitively determine whether the item is a task or a target based on the item's requirements.The functionality of tasks, targets, and the fields within the pop-up is unchanged. XE "Performance" Tasks and targets enable users to break down the different steps that are needed to accomplish the goal and to make the goal more clear to the user's performance manager. Tasks and targets for a goal are set when creating or editing the goal.Tasks are steps or activities that should be done to achieve the goal, and completing these tasks contributes to the overall goal completion progress. Tasks do not generally involve numbers or percent values. For example, if your goal is to have $1 million in sales, a task may be to hold a seminar to attract new customers.Targets are quantifiable benchmarks within your goal that are used to keep the goal on track for completion, and completing these targets contributes to the overall goal completion progress. For example, if your goal is to have $1,000,000 in sales, a target may be to achieve $500,000 in sales from new clients. You can then track your progress in that target as you progress. For example, if after a month you have $100,000 in sales from new clients, you can enter your progress and the target will reflect that you are now 20% complete.To create a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit.To add a task or target to a goal, click the Add Tasks or Targets button on the Create/Edit Goal page.Note: XE "Goals Library" If the Task and Target fields are set as Read-Only in the Goal Configuration settings, then tasks and targets cannot be added to a goal when creating, copying, or advancing the goal. The Task and Target fields can be set as Read-Only for goals that are uploaded to the system via a data feed, imported from the Goals Library, and non-shared goals that are assigned to a user.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceGeneral DetailsEnter the following information for the task or target:Description - Enter a description for the task or target. This is required, and the character limit is 3,000. An example of a description may be "Hold a seminar to attract new customers." or "Achieve $500,000 in sales from new clients."Start Date - Click the Calendar icon to select the date on which the task or target should be started. This is required. The Start Date must be within the dates of the goal, and it must be before the task or target Due Date.Due Date - Click the Calendar icon to select the date by which the task or target should be completed. This is required. The Due Date must be within the dates of the goal, and it must be after the task or target Start Date.Weight - Weighting allows you to place a greater value towards goal completion on certain tasks or targets. This value must be between 0 and 100, and it is set to 0 by default. The weight of all tasks and targets within a goal must add up to 100%. This is required. This field is only available if the administrator has configured Goal Preferences so that tasks and targets are assigned weights.Depending on a backend setting, the weight percentage field may accept up to two decimal places.Include Target - If the task that you are adding has a numeric target or benchmark that you are hoping to reach in order to accomplish the goal, then select this option to define the details of this target. When this option is selected, the below options are enabled and can be edited.If this option is unchecked, then the item is saved as a task. When editing an existing task, this option is not available.If this option is checked, then the item is saved as a target.Target Only DetailsThe following fields only apply to targets, so they are only enabled if the Include Target option is selected. When editing an existing task, these fields are not available because they only apply to targets.Enter the following information for the target:Type XE "Currency" - From the drop-down menu, select how your target values are measured. For example, if the target is a monetary value, the Type would be Currency. The options are Currency, Percentage, Integer, Number, Hours, Days, and Years. This is required.Start Value - In this field, enter any progress you may have already made towards the target. For example, if you are defining a sales target and you have already made a sale before this goal is created, you can include that starting value in this field. Depending on the target type, this value may be negative or positive. This field accepts up to two decimal places unless the target type is Integer. This is required.Target - This is the value that you ultimately need to achieve to complete the target. For example, if your target is to achieve $500,000 in sales, then the target value would be 500,000. This value can be negative or positive. This field accepts up to two decimal places unless the target type is Integer. This is required. Threshold - This value is used to determine whether the target is on track for completion. For example, if your target is to achieve $500,000 in sales, the target value is 500,000. You may set the threshold at 300,000 since you feel that if you reach this threshold value, you are very likely to make the overall target of 500,000. This value must be between the Start Value and the Target. This value can be negative or positive. This field accepts up to two decimal places unless the target type is Integer. This is optional. Stretch XE "Event" - If target and goal progress can exceed 100%, you can set a Stretch value, which is the maximum amount you can report for the target. This value allows you to record additional progress beyond your target. For example, if your target is to achieve $500,000 in sales, the target value is 500,000. You may set the stretch value to 700,000 in the event you are able to exceed your target. This value must be beyond the Target. This value can be negative or positive. This field accepts up to two decimal places unless the target type is Integer. This is optional. Align to Targets - When a target is aligned with another goal's target, then the progress of your target contributes to the parent goal's target. If the goal you are creating is aligned with another goal, this drop-down will be available for you to select a target from the parent goal. This drop-down only contains targets that are available to include results from aligned targets. If the goal you are creating is not aligned with another goal, this drop-down is not available.Include Results - If other employees may align to your goal and target, selecting the option will include their progress with your progress. For example, if you select this option and one of your subordinates aligns with this goal, when they make progress towards their target, your target will update with that information as well.Aligning goal target progress works best with goal targets that are integers or dollars, rather than percentages. XE "Team" An example where it would work well is with Sales dollars. A senior level manager could set a goal to increase sales by $500,000 and each sales representative reporting to that senior manager has his/her own territory goal as a part of that $500,000. As sales team members update the progress of their individual sales goals, their progress is added together to roll up to the senior manager’s overall goal, accurately reflecting total sales dollars in the combined territories.An example when this feature would not work well is with percentages. If the senior level manager’s goal is to increase sales by 5% and each sales representative had their own individualized growth percentage (say, 5%). As sales team members update the progress of their individual sales percentages, their percentages would be added together (5% + 5% + 5%, etc.) to roll up to the senior manager's goal. This total percentage would not accurately reflect the overall percentage increase in sales.Done/CancelClick Done to save the task or target and return to the Create Goal page. The task or target is added to the Tasks & Targets section. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Click Cancel to cancel the task or target creation process and return to the Create Goal page. This discards the new task or target. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information. XE "Goal" Goal - Create from Goal Library XE "Library" With this enhancement, the appearance of the Library pop-up is enhanced. In addition, the ability to view the details of a goal is simplified. XE "Goals Library" The Goals Library is only available if enabled by the administrator.The Goals Library is a valuable resource for users when creating goals. The Goals Library contains a collection of predefined goal templates, which users can pull from to create a goal for themselves or other employees. Goal templates are created by the system administrator.When a user selects a goal template from the Goal Library, all of the information in the template is added to the user's goal, where they can modify or remove any of the information. Note: When a goal is imported from the Goal Library, some fields may be locked, and you cannot edit these fields. If this occurs, the field is disabled on the Create/Edit Goal page.To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button.To view the Goals Library, click the Library button from the Create/Edit Goal page.Note: Field names may be customizable by the system administrator, so your field names may vary.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceSearch Library XE "Organizational Unit" When you open the Library, the existing goal templates display, organized by perspective if perspectives are enabled. The list of available goal templates is constrained by organizational unit (OU). The following search fields and filters are available:Search - Enter terms in the field to search by goal title and description.Perspective XE "Organizational Unit" - The list of available perspectives is constrained by OU. This drop-down is not available if perspectives are not enabled.Category - This drop-down is not available if categories are not enabled.Click the Search button to display only goals that match all of the selected search criteria.View Goal DetailsTo view the details of a goal in the Library, click the goal title or select the radio button to the left of the appropriate goal. The details of the goal are displayed below the goal title, including the goal description, tasks, targets, and weight.Import/CancelTo create a goal from one of the goals in the Library, select the radio button to the left of the appropriate goal and click Import XE "Action" . The details of the selected goal are copied to your new goal. Any details that had been entered for the new goal before the import action are overwritten by the details of the selected Library goal.Note: When a goal is imported from the Goal Library, some fields may be locked, and you cannot edit these fields. If this occurs, the field is disabled on the Create/Edit Goal page. To close the Library pop-up without importing a goal from the Library, click the Close button. XE "Goal" Goal - Align with Another GoalPrior to this enhancement, goal alignment was configured on the Align step.With this enhancement, goal alignment is initiated on the Create Goal page, and goal alignment information is displayed in the upper-right corner of the Create Goal page. Goal alignment is configured using the new Align pop-up, which enables users to view all available goals, search for goals by user, and align to a goal.The functionality of alignment is unchanged.If goal alignment is enabled, the Alignment widget is available in the upper-right corner of the Create/Edit Goal page. XE "Team" Aligning your goal with another goal indicates that your goal directly supports and contributes towards the success of that parent goal. Goal alignment ensures that all employees in a team, division, or company are working to achieve similar goals, and allows employees to see how their efforts contribute to the overall success of the company by creating a hierarchy of goals.When you align to a goal, tasks and targets may be copied to your goal depending on the preferences set by your system administrator. These details can then be modified to be made more appropriate for each user.The instructions at the top of the pop-up are configured by the administrator in Goals Configuration Preferences.To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit.To align a goal with another goal, click the Align Goal button within the Alignment widget.To edit the goal alignment, click the Edit link above the Alignment widget.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCreate Employee Goals - Align XE "Organizational Unit" When creating a goal for users other than self or subordinates, this permission allows administrators to align the goal with other goals. The constraints on this permission determine with which employees the administrator can align the goal. This permission works in conjunction with the Create Employee Goals permission. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationThe Align pop-up displays all goals with which you are allowed to align your goal. Managers must make their goals visible in order for their direct reports to be able to align with them. If they are not made visible, they are not available to be selected.To align your goal with one of the available goals, select the radio button to the left of the appropriate goal. Then, click the Align button. The alignment is not saved until the goal is saved or submitted.Note: If Alignment is configured by the administrator to be read-only, then the goal's alignment cannot be modified when creating, copying, or advancing the goal. Alignment can be set as read-only for goals that are uploaded to the system via a data feed and non-shared goals that are assigned to a user.Alignment and Goal ProgressIn order for goals to contribute to the progress of the goal with which it is aligned, two things must be set:The goals must be aligned.The aligned goals must have targets, and you must select the option to aggregate progress for the target when the target is created. This is done by selecting the Include Results option when creating the target. See Goal - Create/Edit - Add Tasks or Targets PAGEREF _Ref1651378050 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 286 for additional information.Aligning goal target progress works best with goal targets that are integers or dollars, rather than percentages.An example where it would work well is with Sales dollars. A senior level manager could set a goal to increase sales by $500,000 and each sales representative reporting to that senior manager has his/her own territory goal as a part of that $500,000. As sales team members update the progress of their individual sales goals, their progress is added together to roll up to the senior manager’s overall goal, accurately reflecting total sales dollars in the combined territories.An example when this feature would not work well is with percentages. If the senior level manager’s goal is to increase sales by 5% and each sales representative had their own individualized growth percentage (say, 5%). As sales team members update the progress of their individual sales percentages, their percentages would be added together (5% + 5% + 5%, etc.) to roll up to the senior manager's goal. This total percentage would not accurately reflect the overall percentage increase in sales.Search by UserThe option to search for goals by user is only available if enabled by the system administrator. Also, the administrator can configure which users are available to be searched.To search for a goal by user, click the Select icon in the Search by User field. This opens the Select a user page. Search for and select the appropriate user to view all of the user's goals which they have allowed other users to view and align. See Select User Pop-up. When viewing a user's goals, the user's name appears in the Search by User field. If you decide not to align a goal of that user, click the Reset List icon to return to your original view.View Goal DetailsTo view the details of a goal, select the radio button to the left of the goal, or click the goal title.The following information is displayed, if available:Goal DescriptionStart DateDue DateGoal CategoriesStatusProgressTasks and TargetsSuccess DescriptorsEdit Alignment - Do not alignWhen editing the goal alignment, a Do not align option is available. This allows the user to remove the existing alignment and choose to not align with another goal.Align/CloseClick Align to align your goal to the selected goal and return to the Create/Edit Goal page. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Click Close to close the pop-up without modifying the goal alignment and return to the Create/Edit Goal page. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information. XE "Goal" Goal - Assign to Your Team XE "Assign" When creating a goal, managers and administrators with the appropriate permissions are able to create a goal and assign it to members of their team, to the entire organization, to an organizational unit (OU) or group, or to specific users. If the Assignment XE "User" section is not available when creating a goal, then the goal is automatically assigned to the user who is creating the goal.When editing a goal, the Assignment section is not available. However, users can edit the goal manager for goals which they created.To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit. XE "Team" To assign the goal to your entire team or specific members of your team, select the Your Team option in the Assignment section. Once this goal is assigned, it will appear in the My Goals XE "Performance Review" section of the My Goals page for all selected employees. This goal may also appear in each user's performance review.Caution: If the goal is created as a shared goal, be aware that it is not possible to remove a user from a shared goal.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYEmployee Goals - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Allow user to Create Goals for other employees (other than self and subordinates). The constraints on this permission determine with which employees a user can align their goals. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceGoals - Dynamic Assignment OptionGrants ability to specify a goal as dynamically assigned, when assigning the goal to a population of users. If a goal is dynamically assigned, users who later meet the criteria will receive the goal. PerformanceYour Team - Select UsersWhen you select the Your Team option, a list of your direct reports is displayed. Each user's photograph, name, and job title are displayed. The manager who is creating the goal is listed as the first user in the table. This enables you to include yourself in the goal assignment.To assign the goal to a user, select the checkbox to the left of the user's name.Select the Direct and Indirect Reports option for a user to include the selected user's direct and indirect reports in the goal assignment. Selecting this option only assigns the goal to direct and indirect reports for whom you have permission to assign a goal. Selecting this option automatically selects the corresponding user. However, if you select the Direct and Indirect Reports option in the table header, then this selects all checkboxes within the column, but the user checkboxes are not automatically selected.This option is only available if the corresponding user has at least one direct report.This option is not available in the manager's row.To quickly select all users on your team and each user's direct and indirect reports, select the checkbox to the left of the Name column and to the right of the Direct and Indirect Reports column in the table header. Unselecting these options unselects all users and direct reports in the table.OptionsIn this section, determine whether the assignees will share the goal or each work independently towards completing the goal:Create a separate goal for each userIf this option is selected, each user is assigned a separate copy of the goal, and each user is responsible for completing the goal independently. For example, if the goal is to have $1 million in sales and you assign it to five users, each user will have to earn $1 million in sales for a total of $5 million. In this case, each user will be the owner of their own goal, allowing them to edit the goal or report progress on it.Once this goal is assigned, it will appear on the My Goals page for all selected employees where they can edit and manage it. This goal may also appear in their performance review.Dynamic Assignment - This option is only available when creating a separate goal for each user, and it is only available for users who have permission to dynamically assign goals. When this option is selected, the goal is assigned to all selected users in the team, and the goal will also be assigned to any users who join the team between the goal start date and target/due date. Any users who join the team after the goal target/due date are not assigned the goal. Employees who are on the team but are excluded from the initial assignment are not assigned the goal as a result of the dynamic setting.When the Dynamic Assignment option is not selected, the goal is only assigned to the selected users.If a user is assigned a goal with the Dynamic Assignment option selected, and then leaves the team, the user continues to have the goal. The user is not dynamically removed from the goal.All users will share this goal and its progressThis option is only available if the administrator has enabled the ability to create a shared goal.If this option is selected, the assigned users share the goal, and each user's progress contributes to the progress of the shared goal. For example, if the goal is to have $1 million in sales, the selected users will work together to earn a total of $1 million.Managed by - A shared goal must be managed by a single user, and this user is considered the goal owner. The manager can choose to be the goal owner or select one of the assigned users. Although each selected user will contribute to the goal, the goal owner is responsible for editing and updating the goal progress. For example, if Mary is the goal owner and Bob makes a sale towards the goal, Bob cannot enter that information on the goal. Only Mary can update the progress of the goal.A team shared goal is not assigned dynamically. For example, if a user is assigned the goal and then leaves the team, they will continue to have the shared goal. If a user joins the team, they will not inherit the shared goal.Manager Goal BehaviorWhen a manager assigns a goal to members of their team and the manager is also selected in the assignment, the behavior that the manager experiences once the goal is approved depends on the goal configuration:Separate Goal - If a separate goal is created for each user, then each selected employee receives the individual, independent goal.Shared Goal - If the goal is a shared goal, two scenarios are possible:Manager is selected as the goal owner:The goal appears on the My Goals section of the My Goals page for the manager with an asterisk indicating it is a shared goal.The goal can appear in the manager's performance reviews.The manager can manage and edit the goal as the goal owner.Manager is not selected as the goal owner:The goal appears on the My Goals section of the My Goals page for the manager with an asterisk indicating it is a shared goal.The goal will not appear in the manager's performance reviews. This is true for all users who are not the goal manager within shared goals.The manager cannot manage and edit the goal. XE "Goal" Goal - Assign to Custom Assignment XE "Assign" When creating a goal, managers and administrators with the appropriate permissions are able to create a goal and assign it to members of their team, to the entire organization, to an organizational unit (OU) or group, or to specific users. If the Assignment XE "User" section is not available when creating a goal, then the goal is automatically assigned to the user who is creating the goal.When editing a goal, the Assignment section is not available. However, users can edit the goal manager for goals which they created.To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit. XE "Organizational Unit" To assign the goal to the entire organization, to an OU or group, or to specific users, select the Custom Assignment option in the Assignment section. Then, configure the assignment to include the appropriate selections.Caution: If the goal is created as a shared goal, be aware that it is not possible to remove a user from a shared goal. Note: This functionality is generally only available to system administrators. PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCompany Goals - CreateGrants access to create goals that appear to all users as "company goals." This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationEmployee Goals - CreateAllow user to Create Goals for other employees (other than self and subordinates). The constraints on this permission determine with which employees a user can align their goals. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and User. This is an administrator permission.Performance - AdministrationGoals - Dynamic Assignment OptionGrants ability to specify a goal as dynamically assigned, when assigning the goal to a population of users. If a goal is dynamically assigned, users who later meet the criteria will receive the goal. PerformanceOU Goals - Create XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create and assign goals to all users within a selected organizational unit or group. This is an administrator permission.The constraints on this permission overwrite the constraints on the Goals - Create permission. That is, if a user has both permissions, then the constraints on the OU Goals - Create permission are applied.Performance - AdministrationTo select the custom assignment criteria, click the drop-down menu and select the appropriate option. The following options are available:All UsersAll Available OU TypesUsersAssign to All Users (Company Goal)To assign the goal to the entire organization, select All Users from the drop-down menu. This option is only available to administrators who have permission to create company pany goals appear in the Company Goals XE "Performance Review" section of the My Goals page for all users in the company. This goal will not appear in a performance review, but can be used in compensation tasks.If there are multiple administrators who have the permission to create company goals, they all share each company goal. For example, if Mike, Sara, and Jim have permission to create company goals and Sara creates a company goal, Mike and Jim will also share that goal. As a result, Mike and Jim will also be able to edit, update, and cancel that goal. XE "Group" Assign to OU or GroupTo assign the goal to all users within a specific OU or group, select the appropriate OU type from the drop-down menu. Then, click the Select icon to select the appropriate OUs or groups. This option is only available to administrators who have permission to create OU goals.Your selections are displayed in the Criteria table. Select the Include Subordinates option for an OU to include the child OUs for each OU in the goal assignment. If there are no child OUs, this option does not appear. Select the Include Subordinates option for a group to include direct and indirect reports for each user in the group.When assigning a goal to OUs or groups, a goal can be assigned to different types of OUs at the same time. For example, a goal can be assigned to a Division OU and a Position OU at the same time. When an OU is selected, the OU type is displayed along with the OU name.If a user exists in more than one of the selected OUs for the goal assignment, the user is only assigned the goal once.You can remove a selected OU or group by clicking the Remove icon to the left of the item. Assign to Specific UsersTo assign the goal to specific users, select the Users option from the drop-down menu. Then, click the Select icon to select the appropriate users. This option is only available to administrators who have permission to create user goals.Your selections are displayed in the Criteria table. Select the Include Subordinates option for a user to include the selected user's direct and indirect reports in the goal assignment.You can remove a selected user by clicking the Remove icon to the left of the user. OptionsIn this section, determine whether the assignees will share the goal or each work independently towards completing the goal:Create a separate goal for each userIf this option is selected, each user is assigned a separate copy of the goal, and each user is responsible for completing the goal independently. For example, if the goal is to have $1 million in sales and you assign it to five users, each user will have to earn $1 million in sales for a total of $5 million. In this case, each user will be the owner of their own goal, allowing them to edit the goal or report progress on it.Once this goal is assigned, it will appear on the My Goals page for all selected employees where they can edit and manage it. This goal may also appear in their performance review.Dynamic Assignment - This option is only available when creating a separate goal for each user, and it is only available for users who have permission to dynamically assign goals. When this option is selected, the goal is assigned to all users within the assignment criteria, and the goal will also be assigned to any users who meet the assignment criteria at any time between the goal start date and target/due date. Any users who match the assignment criteria after the goal target/due date are not assigned the goal.When the Dynamic Assignment option is not selected, the goal is only assigned to users who meet the assignment criteria when the goal is created.If a user is assigned a goal with the Dynamic Assignment option selected, and then the user no longer matches the assignment criteria, the user continues to have the goal. The user is not dynamically removed from the goal.All users will share this goal and its progressThis option is only available if the administrator has enabled the ability to create a shared goal.If this option is selected, the assigned users share the goal, and each user's progress contributes to the progress of the shared goal. For example, if the goal is to have $1 million in sales, the selected users will work together to earn a total of $1 million.Managed by - A shared goal must be managed by a single user, and this user is considered the goal owner. The manager can choose to be the goal owner or select one of the assigned users. Although each selected user will contribute to the goal, the goal owner is responsible for editing and updating the goal progress. For example, if Mary is the goal owner and Bob makes a sale towards the goal, Bob cannot enter that information on the goal. Only Mary can update the progress of the goal.A shared goal for an OU is assigned dynamically. For example, if a user leaves the assignment criteria, they will no longer have the shared goal. If a user joins the assignment criteria, they will inherit the shared goal.A shared goal for a Division appears in the Division Goals section of the My Goals page for all users in the division when the Division Goals option is selected. This goal will not appear in a performance review. All other shared goals appear in the My Goals section of the My Goals page and may appear in performance reviews. XE "Goal" Goal - Manage Success DescriptorsThe appearance of the Manage Success Descriptors pop-up is improved. However, the functionality of the pop-up is unchanged.Success descriptors allow you to define how you deem success in relation to the goal. To create a goal, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Goals. Then click the Create button. To edit a goal, go to Performance > Goals. Click the Actions menu icon to the right of the appropriate goal and select Edit.To set success descriptors for a goal, when creating or editing a goal, click the Manage button in the Success Descriptors section. The Define Success Descriptors pop-up appears. If the administrator has entered default success descriptors, they are displayed. Note: The Success Descriptors label can be customized by the administrator, so the section name may appear differently in your portal.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYGoals - Create XE "User" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceThe success descriptor titles cannot be edited, as they are intended to be consistent for all users. To edit the success descriptor, enter a description of the level of success that corresponds to the success level. If the administrator has provided a default description, this appears in the Description XE "HTML" field, but can be edited. The description that you enter should represent your interpretation of what success means to you for each success level. For example, if the goal success title is Exceeds Expectations, then enter what you feel that success level represents. This field accepts HTML, and the character limit is 1,000. After the goal is approved, these descriptions are only editable if enabled by the administrator. Note: Only HTML from the HTML Whitelist can be used. See HTML Whitelist.If Success Descriptors are required by the administrator, you must enter a description for each goal success title.Note: Depending on the system configuration, users may not be able to edit success descriptors after the goal is approved.Save/CancelClick Save to save the goal's success descriptors and close the pop-up.Click Cancel to discard any unsaved changes and close the pop-up. XE "Goal" Goal - Manage XE "Team" With this enhancement, the ability to manage a goal is much simpler. Goals can be managed from the My Goals page, the Team Goals page, XE "Snapshot" and the Snapshot Goals page.The Manage Goal view is a complete view of the goal, including details, progress, perspective, alignment, task and target progress, attachments, and comments. From this view, you can manage goal progress, task progress, and target progress. You can also add attachments and comments to the goal.A goal can be managed by clicking the goal title or the Right arrow to the right of the goal on the following pages:My GoalsTeam GoalsSnapshot GoalsPermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCompany Goals - CreateGrants access to create goals that appear to all users as "company goals." This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission. XE "Performance" Performance - AdministrationView Goals XE "Role" Grants ability to view own goals and (depending on role and settings) goals of others (manager's visible goals, direct subordinate's goals, company goals, division goals). This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceAlignmentIf goal alignment is enabled, the Alignment widget is available in the upper-right corner of the page.Aligning your goal with another goal indicates that your goal directly supports and contributes towards the success of that parent goal. Goal alignment ensures that all employees in a team, division, or company are working to achieve similar goals, and allows employees to see how their efforts contribute to the overall success of the company by creating a hierarchy of goals.When you align to a goal, tasks and targets may be copied to your goal depending on the preferences set by your system administrator. These details can then be modified to be made more appropriate for each user.If your goal is aligned with another goal, the Alignment widget displays the alignment hierarchy of the goal. For example, if my goal is aligned to my manager's goal, then my manager's goal is displayed above my goal with a connecting line to my goal. The goal's title is displayed, and the color bar on the left of the goal card indicates the goal's status at the time the page is loaded. Users can hover the computer cursor over the goal card to view the goal title and status.Up to three goals are displayed in the widget. For example, if my goal is aligned with my manager's goal, and my manager's goal is aligned with my indirect manager's goal, then these three goals are all displayed in the widget.Goal SummaryThe goal summary is displayed at the top of the goal:Progress - This indicates the goal's progress as a percentage. The color of the progress bar is determined by the goal status. Users may have the option to update goal progress using a progress slider. The goal progress is automatically saved as the progress slider is moved. The goal progress slider is only available if the following is true:Administrators have enabled goal progress to be displayed. If goal progress is not displayed, then users are not able to update goal progress.Administrators have prevented goal progress from exceeding 100%. If goal progress is allowed to exceed 100%, then goal progress is updated via a Progress field above the Description field.The goal does not contain tasks or targets. If the goal contains tasks or targets, then goal progress is updated by updating the progress of the task or target.The goal is not in Draft status.Title - If the goal is a shared goal, an asterisk appears before the goal title. Status - This indicates the overall standing of the goal. This can be determined by goal, task, and target progress and can also factor in the amount of time remaining for completion. The status is also reflected in the progress color. For example, if a user has satisfied a goal, the Status will be Completed and the progress bar may be blue. The names, colors, and the criteria for each status can be modified by the system administrator.Due DateWeight - The goal weight is used to prioritize goals and place additional value on certain goals.Perspective - The perspective is used to specify to which aspect of the company the goal relates.Aligned To - This displays the owner of the goal to which the direct report's goal is aligned. This only displays if the goal is aligned to another goal.Goal ProgressThis indicates the goal's progress as a percentage. Users may have the option to update goal progress using this field. Depending on the configuration of the portal, the progress percentage field may accept up to two decimal places. Goal progress is automatically saved as when you move the cursor from the field. This field may be available if the following are true:Administrators have enabled goal progress to be displayed. If goal progress is not displayed, then users are not able to update goal progress.Administrators have enabled goal progress to exceed 100%.The goal contains one or more tasks or targets. If the goal contains tasks or targets, then goal progress is updated by updating the progress of the task or target.The goal is not in Draft status.This field is not available if any of the following are true:Administrators have disabled goal progress from being displayed.The goal is in Draft status.Note: Only users with permission to create company goals can update the progress of a company goal and add attachments to a company goal.Note: If the Progress field is set as Read-Only in the Goal Configuration settings, the overall goal completion progress cannot be updated. The Progress field can be set as Read-Only for goals that are uploaded to the system via a data feed.Goal DetailsThe following details are displayed below the goal summary:DescriptionStart DateCategoryTask and TargetsTasks and targets enable users to break down the different steps that are needed to accomplish the goal and to make the goal more clear to the user's performance manager. The following information is displayed for each task and target:DescriptionThreshold - This value may only be displayed if a target value was defined.Target - This value is only displayed if a target value was defined. If the results of your target contribute to the results of another target, then the overall progress of the aligned target is displayed. This includes the progress that you have contributed, the progress that is inherited, and the overall target.Stretch - This value is only displayed if a target value was defined.Start DateDue DateWeightFor tasks, a Progress field is available. Update your completion progress by modifying this value. Updating task progress increases the overall goal progress as well. Depending on the configuration of the portal, the progress percentage fields may accept up to two decimal places. For targets, an Actual field is available. Update this value to indicate your progress towards achieving the target. Updating target progress may increase the overall goal progress as well.When you update the task or target progress, the progress is automatically saved when you move the cursor from the field.If Weight or Progress is disabled, they will not display.Note: Only users with permission to create company goals can update the progress of a company goal and add attachments to a company goal.Note: XE "Library" If the Task and Target field is set as Read-Only in the Goal Configuration settings, Task and Target progress cannot be updated when managing the goal. Task and Target progress can be set as Read-Only for goals that are uploaded to the system via a data feed and non-shared goals that are assigned to a user. Also, Task progress can be set as Read-Only for goals that are imported from the Goal Library.AttachmentsYou can attach any documents that are relevant to the goal. This enables you to include more details or references that support the goal so that anyone viewing the goal can view the resources if they are evaluating or aligning to the goal.Up to three attachments can be added to a goal. The maximum file size is 1 MB.Attachments can be avi, bmp, csv, doc, docx, gif, jpg, jpeg, jpe, mov, pdf, png, ppt, pptx, txt, xls, xlsx, and zip. You can attach a file by dragging and dropping a file into the Attachment area. You can also attach a file by clicking the Choose File button and select a file from your computer. Note: The drag-and-drop functionality is not supported by Internet Explorer browsers.After the file is attached, the attachment appears in the Attachments section.An attachment can be removed by clicking the Cancel icon to the right of the attachment name.Success DescriptorsSuccess descriptors allow you to define how you deem success in relation to the goal. This section displays the success descriptors that have been defined for the goal. Note: The term "Success Descriptors" can be customized by the administrator, so the section name may appear differently in your portal. CommentsIf the Comments section is enabled, it allows you and your manager to add comments related to all aspects of your goal. For example, you may add a comment to explain your recent efforts toward this goal. You manager can then reply to your comments or they can add an unrelated comment. Comments are displayed with the user's profile picture and a timestamp. The three most recent comments are displayed by default, including replies to those comments. In order to view any additional comments, click the Show previous ment ActionsTo add a new comment, click the Add Comment link. This adds a field in which you can add your comment. After entering your comment, click Add to add the comment to the goal.To reply to a comment, click the Reply icon below the comment. This adds a field in which you can add your reply. After entering your reply, click Reply to add the reply to the comment.To delete a comment you have added, select Delete from the Options drop-down menu . You can delete any comments that you have added.To edit a comment you have added, select Edit from the Options drop-down menu .Last SavedWhen you update the goal, task, or target progress, the progress is automatically saved when you move the cursor from the field. At that point, the time at which the goal was automatically saved by the system is displayed to the left of the Close button. This enables you to be sure that your changes have been saved.Changes to the attachments and comments are saved when the action is performed. These actions do not update the Last Saved time.CloseTo close the expanded goal card, click Close at the bottom of the goal or click the goal title. XE "Goal" Goal - View HistoryWith this enhancement, the goal history is now displayed in a pop-up, which is accessed from the Options drop-down menu. Previously, the History section was displayed at the bottom of the Manage Goal page. XE "Approval" The History pop-up displays all of the goal's history, including creation, edits, and approval/denial. The addition or removal of any comments or attachments are not included in the History pop-up. The History pop-up can be viewed for a goal by selecting View History on the following pages:From the Options drop-down menu in the upper-right corner of the Edit Goal page.From the Options drop-down menu to the right of the goal on the My Goals page.From the Options drop-down menu XE "Team" to the right of the goal on the Team Goals page.From the Options drop-down menu XE "Snapshot" to the right of the goal on the Snapshot Goals page.The following information is displayed for each item in the History pop-up:Name - This displays the name of the goal, task, or target that was impacted. XE "Action" Action - This displays the action that was taken for the goal, task, or target. XE "User" Updated By - This displays the name of the user who took the action on the goal, task, or target.Type - This displays whether the action was taken on the goal or a task or target within the goal.Date - This displays the date and time at which the action was completed.By default, the pop-up only displays edits and updates to the goal. History information related to tasks and targets is not displayed. To include history information related to tasks and targets, select the Include Tasks and Targets option. This option name and the availability of the option dependent on the configuration of the goal functionality.For edits to the goal details, users can view additional details for the modification by clicking the Right arrow to the left of the Name column. This displays the specific field that was modified, the previous value of the field, and the new value of the field. Note: This is only available for modifications to the goal details. This is not available for progress updates or modifications to tasks and targets.To close the pop-up, click the Close button. XE "Snapshot" Snapshot GoalsWith this enhancement, the appearance of goals on the Snapshot Goals page is enhanced. The option to create a goal is now more visible. Also, users now have the ability to view the details of a goal, add comments and attachments to a goal, and update goal progress.The Snapshot Goals page enables users, managers, and administrators to view a summary of the user's goals. Users can also create goals, view goal details, and update goal progress. The availability of certain functionality is determined by the user's permissions.To access the Snapshot Goals page, go to XE "Universal Profile" Home > Universal Profile. Click the Snapshot tab. Then, click the Goals widget.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCompany Goals - CreateGrants access to create goals that appear to all users as "company goals." This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission. XE "Performance" Performance - Administration XE "Dashboard" Dashboard - ViewGrants the ability to view dashboards created by self or shared by others. User must also have permission to view the standard reports that are included in any shared dashboards. If a user does not have permission to view a report type, the user cannot view that report type within the dashboard. This is an end user permission.Reports - DashboardsGoals - Create XE "Relationship" Grants ability for user to create goals for self (and direct and indirect reports if a manager). The permission constraints determine for whom the user can create goals. This permission can be constrained by Custom Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceGoal Status ReportGrants access to the Goal Status Report, which summarizes the status of all goals for specific users during a specified date range.Reports - PerformanceGoal Target Report XE "Organizational Unit" Grants access to the Goal Target report, which summarizes all goal targets for specific users during a specific time period, regardless of the goal to which they belong. This report can be run on multiple users, but is always grouped by user. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Reports - PerformanceGoal Tasks Summary ReportGrants access to Goal Tasks Summary Report, which summarizes all goal tasks for specific users during a specific time period, regardless of the goal to which each task belongs. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, and User.Reports - PerformanceSnapshot - GoalsEnables user to view the Goals widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfileView Goals XE "Role" Grants ability to view own goals and (depending on role and settings) goals of others (manager's visible goals, direct subordinate's goals, company goals, division goals). This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, and User Self and Subordinates. This is an end user permission.PerformanceCreate GoalTo create a new goal, click the Create button in the upper-right corner of the page. This option is only available if you have permission to create a goal. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Previously, the option to create a goal was available from the Options drop-down menu.OptionsWith this enhancement, the Create Goal option is removed from the Options drop-down menu. XE "Document" A Download PDF option is now available in the Options drop-down menu. Select this option to export the goals on the page to a PDF document.Goal ProgressThe overall goal progress display is unchanged.Search and Filter GoalsThe search and filter options are unchanged. XE "Approval" Send Approval Request XE "Request" Users can now request approval for their goals from the Snapshot Goals page. Previously, this was only available on the Goals main page.The Send Approval Request XE "Email" button is available in the upper-right corner of the page if you have goals that are pending approval. Click this button to send an email to your goal approver if the Request Goal Approval email is enabled. Once the request is sent, the button text is updated to "Request Sent" until the page is refreshed.If goal approval is not required or if a goal approver is not set, then goals are automatically approved when they are created, edited, or cancelled.EmailsEMAIL NAMEEMAIL DESCRIPTIONACTION TYPERequest Goal ApprovalThis email is a batch type email that includes a notification for each situation in which a goal owner does the following:Creates and submits a goal for themselves when approval is required. Edits and resubmits a goal that has already been approved.Attempts to cancel a goal that has been approved when approval is required.This email is triggered when a user clicks the Send Approval Request button on the My Goals screen.The email is sent to the user in the Approver role. If no approver is set or if goal approval is not required, the goal is automatically approved and no email is sent.The email can contain a link to the Pending Goals page.Performance ManagementGoal SummaryThe information that is displayed in the goal summary for each goal is unchanged. However, the manner in which the goal progress is displayed is slightly updated.Lock Goal ResultsPreviously, the option to lock a goal or mark the goal results as final was available from the Options drop-down menu.The ability to lock a goal is only available when viewing the Snapshot Goals page for a direct report.Depending on the configuration of the portal, a Lock icon may appear to the right of a direct report's goal. Managers can click this icon to lock or unlock the goal. The following statuses are available:Locked XE "Performance Review" - This indicates that the goal is locked. Users cannot update the goal progress or edit the goal. Managers may lock a goal at the end of the goal period or at the beginning of a review period. This prevents any miscommunication between the manager and employee. Click this icon to unlock the goal.Unlocked - This indicates that the goal is unlocked. Users can update the goal progress and edit the goal. Click this icon to lock the goal.Manage GoalTo update goal progress, add comments or attachments to a goal, or view goal details, click the goal title or click the Right arrow to the right of the goal. See Goal - Manage PAGEREF _Ref-1158638182 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 307 for additional information.Goal ActionsThe following actions may be available from the Options drop-down menu to the right of the goal:Edit - Select this option to edit the goal. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator and the goal is not locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Shared goals cannot be edited by anyone other than the goal owner. Copy - Select this option to copy the goal. All of the goal details are copied to the new goal except for the Assignment, Alignment, Attachments, and Comments. Also, the Start Date and End Date are set to the default values. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is not expired. Also, this option is not available if goals are locked. See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information.Cancel - Select this option to cancel the goal. A confirmation pop-up opens to confirm the cancellation. This option is only available if enabled by the system administrator. Also, this option is only available for unlocked, non-draft goals.If cancellation approval is not required, then the goal's status becomes Canceled.If cancellation approval is required, then the goal's status becomes Pending Cancellation Approval, and the Request Goal Approval email is triggered if it is enabled.Shared goals cannot be canceled by anyone other than the goal owner.Advance - Select this option for an expired goal to copy the details of the goal and set the Start Date and End Date to the next goal period. The goal progress is reset for the new goal. For example, if the expired goal had a start and end date of 01/01/15-12/31/15, once you advance the goal, the new start and end date will be 01/01/16-12/31/16 and the goal progress is set to zero. This action is intended to help save time creating goals for the new goal period if they are similar to the previous period. This option is only available if you have permission to create goals and the goal is expired. Also, this option is not available if goals are locked.View History - Select this option to view the history of the goal. The name of the user who updated the goal is included with the type of update and the date and time of the update. See Goal - View History PAGEREF _Ref-1386247912 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 313 for additional information. XE "Universal Profile" Universal Profile - View All GoalsThroughout Universal Profile, the Options drop-down menu contains a View All Goals option. Prior to this enhancement, the View All Goals option directed users to the Goals main page. XE "Snapshot" If redesigned Goals functionality is enabled, the View All Goals now directs users to the Snapshot Goals page.Manage Shared and Dynamic GoalsThe Manage Shared and Dynamic Goals page enables administrators or managers to edit shared and dynamic goals on behalf of the goal owner or goal manager. This page is only available when enabled via Navigation Tabs and Links.For organizations using the redesigned Goals functionality, editing a goal from the Manage Shared and Dynamic Goals page utilizes the redesigned Edit Goal page.To manage shared and dynamic goals, go to XE "Performance" Performance > Manage Shared and Dynamic Goals. The location may vary depending on the settings in Navigation Tabs and Links.PermissionPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYManage Shared and Dynamic Goals XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to turn off the dynamic behavior and edit a dynamic goal from the Edit Goals page. The administrator or manager can only view and edit goals created by users that exist within the OU constraints set for this permission.Performance XE "Performance" Performance Review - Goal Planning Section XE "Performance Review" For organizations using the redesigned Goals functionality, creating and editing a goal within a Goal Planning performance review section utilizes the redesigned Create Goal page.When creating a goal from within a Goal Planning performance review section, the goal's Start Date and Due Date are set to the default goal period that is configured by the administrator in the Goal Planning performance review section.See Goal - Create/Edit PAGEREF _Ref-16263860 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 277 for additional information. XE "Performance" Performance Reviews - Decline to SignPerformance Reviews - Decline to Sign XE "Sign Off" With this enhancement, organizations can now provide reviewers with the option to decline to add their signature to the Sign Off section of a performance review. This allows the reviewer to indicate that they do not agree with the outcome of the performance review. When a reviewer declines to sign off on a performance review, this is clearly reflected throughout the performance review and in the printable performance review. Use Cases XE "Performance Review Task" Kelly is a performance administrator for a school district and must create an annual performance review task for all of the school district's teachers. Due to an agreement with the state's teacher's union, Kelly wants to ensure that teachers have the ability to refuse to sign their performance review. Kelly creates a performance review Sign Off section for teachers and enables the option to decline to sign for the Self role. When teachers complete their performance review, they will see the option to decline to sign off on the performance review. XE "Custom Reports" After the performance review task has been completed by all reviewers, Kelly creates a custom report to view all of the reviewees who declined to sign their performance review so that she can work with the school district and the state's teacher's union to address any issues.ConsiderationsThis functionality only impacts organizations that are using the redesigned performance reviews functionality.ImplementationThis functionality is automatically enabled for all organizations using the Performance module. By default, all Sign Off sections have the Decline to sign option disabled. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permission applies to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYPerformance Review Form Sections - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create and manage performance review questions and sections which are used in performance review tasks. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Performance - Administration XE "Sign Off" Sign Off Review Section - Decline to SignWith this enhancement, a new Decline to sign XE "Performance" option is now available for each signature that is added to a Sign Off performance review section. This option is unselected by default. When this option is selected, the corresponding role (e.g., Self, Manager) has the option to decline to add their signature to the Sign Off section of the performance review. This allows the reviewer to indicate that they do not agree with the outcome of the performance review. This option is only available when Electronic or Authenticated is selected as the signature method. If Manual is selected, this option is disabled and cannot be selected. Best Practice: XE "Reviewer" As a best practice, this option should only be selected for the Self reviewer role, and it should only be selected for organizations in which a performance review can be completed without a reviewer's sign off. XE "Performance Review Task" A new version of the Sign Off section is created if the section has been included in a performance review task and one of the following occurs: XE "Role" A new reviewer role is added to the Signatures section.A reviewer role is removed from the Signatures section.The Decline to sign option is selected for a role.The signature method is modified for a reviewer role. XE "Performance Review" To create a performance review section, go to Admin > Tools > Performance Management > Form Sections. Then, click the Create Review Section link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYPerformance Review Form Sections - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to create and manage performance review questions and sections which are used in performance review tasks. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Performance - Administration XE "Performance" Performance Review - Sign Off Section XE "Sign Off" Depending on the configuration of the Sign Off performance review section, a Decline to Sign XE "Reviewer" option may be available to a reviewer on the Sign Off step of the performance review. This enables the reviewer to decline to add their signature to the Sign Off section of the performance review to indicate that they do not agree with the outcome of the performance review. When the reviewer selects this option, the Sign button and the First and last name XE "Performance Review" field are disabled. Also, a notification appears at the top of all performance review steps to indicate that the reviewer declined to sign the performance review.If the reviewer has already signed the performance review, then the Decline to sign option is hidden. If the reviewer chooses to remove their signature prior to submitting the performance review, they can click the Redo button to remove their signature. At this point, the Decline to sign option is available again.In read-only mode, the Decline to sign is not displayed if it was not selected during the performance review. XE "Performance Review Task" In the printable performance review, if the reviewer declines to sign the performance review task, then "Decline to sign" is displayed in the user's signature area and no date is populated in the Date field. This clearly indicates that the user did not sign the performance review. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting XE "Onboarding" ADP Workforce Now Integration for Recruiting and Onboarding XE "User" An integration is now available for ADP WorkForce Now (WFN). With this integration, when an external candidate is hired and their User Record is created in Cornerstone, their user information is sent to WFN. Within WFN, the HR Administrator or manager can update the user's profile with additional information and advance that user as an employee.This enables organizations to better manage their users when an external candidate is hired.Prior to this integration, there was a manual process to import the user data from Cornerstone to WFN.Implementation XE "Template" In order to utilize this functionality, organizations need to purchase ADP WFN, and then contact Cornerstone to configure the integration. Organizations must have the latest version of WFN and also create a template titled "Applicant Onboard" within their WFN environment prior implementing the integration.In order to purchase this integration, please contact Sales or your Client Executive. XE "Recruiting" Global Recruiting LocalizationGlobal Recruiting Localization Overview XE "Job Requisition" For portals with multiple languages enabled, this enhancement enables a single job requisition to be created in multiple languages and allows administrators, hiring managers, recruiters, and applicants to view location-appropriate content in their preferred language. Prior to this enhancement, individual job requisitions had to be created for each language. XE "Applicant" Localization options are added to multiple areas of the Applicant Tracking System (ATS), which allows administrators and recruiters to enter translated values when configuring requisition templates, job requisitions, and other areas of the anizational unit localization is part of a separate enhancement for the February '16 release. See Organizational Unit Localization Overview PAGEREF _Ref-772631069 \p \h \* MERGEFORMAT on page 101 for additional information.Use Cases XE "Interview" Interview Guide XE "Preference" - An administrator creates a localized interview guide in English and German so that interviewers in North America and Germany can follow the same interview competencies and ask the same interview questions to candidates. The interviewer based in Germany has German as his system language preference and is able to view the interview guide in German. XE "Career" Career Site - An administrator creates a localized career site that allows applicants to view the site in either English or Chinese. When an applicant selects Chinese from the career site language selector, the applicant will view the career site job search results (assuming requisitions are localized in Chinese; if not, the requisition's default language will display instead) and company logo in Chinese on the site. XE "Application Workflow" Application Workflow XE "Recruiter" - A recruiter who is a native English speaker creates an application workflow template that can be configured and viewed in multiple languages. This allows the organization’s French administrator and German hiring manager to view, modify, or copy the template in their preferred language. This also allows applicants to be able to apply for jobs in English, French, or German, since the company operates in areas where people have different native languages.Job Requisitions - A recruiter creates a single job requisition in multiple languages so that other recruiters with different default languages can view, copy, edit, and search for that requisition in different languages. This also allows applicants to view job requisitions in multiple languages, since the company operates in areas where people have different native languages.Considerations XE "Recruiting" The following areas of the Applicant Tracking System (ATS) will not be localized:Compliance questions XE "Video" Image and video widgets on career sitesOffer letters XE "Form Management" Old Form Management XE "Search Candidates" Old Search Candidates (Note: Candidate Search Query will be localized with this enhancement.)Requisition Requests XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Template" Application Workflow Template - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage Application Workflow Templates. This permission can be constrained by OU and User’s OU. This is an administrator permission.Recruiting AdministrationApplication Workflow Template - ViewGrants ability to access and view Application Workflow Templates. Recruiting Administration XE "Career Center" Career Center - View XE "Resume" Enables users to view the Career Center, including Resume, Career Preferences, Career Pathing and Job Search, depending on enabled components and preferences. This permission also enables users to view the Internal Job Search widget on the Welcome Page and custom pages. This is an end user permission. XE "Succession" Talent/SuccessionCareer Site - ManageGrants ability to access and manage Career Site Management. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Recruiting AdministrationCareer Site - ViewGrants ability to access and view Career Site Management. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting Administration XE "Requisition Template" Default Requisition Template - ManageGrants access to manage Default Requisition Template Preferences. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationInterview Guide - ManageGrants ability to access and manage Interview Guide Management. This permission can be constrained by User. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting Administration XE "Dashboard" Recruiting Manager DashboardGrants access to the Recruiting Manager Dashboard page. This permission cannot be constrained.RecruitingRequisition: Manage XE "Performance Review" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade.RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Applicant Profile" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Role" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.RecruitingRequisition Template - ManageGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationRequisition Template - ViewGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationFrequently Asked QuestionsThe following Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) apply to this enhancement: XE "Career" What gets translated on career sites when applicants select a language from the language drop-down?The language that applicants select in the language drop-down on the career site determines the language in which career site fields, static text and buttons, widgets, header, and footer appear. For example, if the Search Jobs widget is included on the career site widget settings, then the words "Search Jobs" displays in the language the applicant selects in the language drop-down on the career site.Note: If an applicant changes the language in the language drop-down on the career site, then this also changes the language on their My Profile page. XE "Selection" What does the My Profile language selection translate on career sites? XE "Application" The language that applicants select when editing their profile on the My Profile page determines the language in which the names of system fields appear on an application, as well as the values for any localized content that may exist. For example, pre-screening questions are localized in German and therefore the names of system fields as well as the pre-screening questions will all display in German on the application.Are job requisitions translated based on the language selected by the applicant from the language drop-down on career sites? XE "Recruiter" No. The translatable values on job requisitions display in the applicant's preferred language on the career site only if a translation was made for the field when the job requisition was configured. For example, the job title will only display in the applicant's preferred language on the career site if the recruiter translated the job title into the applicant's preferred language when creating the requisition and the applicant selects the language from the language drop-down on the career site.Can I remove the default language value for a required field once the default language has been defined?No. The default language value cannot be removed. If you delete the value for the default language, the Save XE "Action" action cannot be performed. For example, an administrator whose default language is English (US) creates an interview guide. He enters the title (a required field) for the interview guide in English and also provides Chinese and German translations. Once the guide is saved, the administrator tries to remove the English value for the title so that the title will only displays in Chinese and German. He opens the guide, and then clicks the Translate icon next to the title to open the Translate pop-up. He deletes the value in the English (US) field and clicks Save. However, the Save action cannot be performed because there is no value in the English (US) field in the Translate pop-up.What is the default language for localized fields?The default language is the system language of the administrator or recruiter who defined the field. For example, a recruiter's system language is English (US). When creating a job requisition, she translates the display job title into French (France) and Spanish (Spain). The default language for the display job title is English (US). If an applicant whose preferred language is Chinese views the job on the career site, the job title will appear in English (US) because a Chinese translation is not available and the default language for the field is English (US). XE "User" What happens when a field that is initially created in one language is copied by a user with a different default system language, and the field has not been translated into the new user's default language?The text in the translation field in the Translate pop-up displays in the original user's default language. The new user will not need to enter a translation for the field in their own default language, as the value will have been copied over.What happens when a field that is initially created in one language is copied by a user with a different default system language, and the field has been translated into the new user's default language?The text in the translation field in the Translate pop-up displays in the new user's default language. The new user will not need to enter a translation for the field in their own default language.Are translated values automatically entered for all languages in the Translate pop-up?No. All translated values must be manually entered. Only the translation for the user's default language is populated into the corresponding language field in the Translate pop-up once the user enters a value for the field in the system. For example, a recruiter whose default language is English (US) enters a title for a job requisition. When the recruiter clicks the Translate icon to open the Translate pop-up and enter translated values into other languages, only the English (US) field is populated.Agency Portal XE "User" With this enhancement, fields on the My Jobs and My Submissions tabs, as well as the Manage Submissions page, display localized values, if available in the user's language. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisitionTo access the Agency Portal page, go to Recruit > Agency Portal.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYAgency PortalGrants access to manage the Agency Portal page. This permission cannot be constrained. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingMy JobsIn the My Jobs section, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available:Job TitleJob Ad textMy SubmissionsIn the My Submissions section, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available:Job TitleManage SubmissionsOn the Manage Submissions page, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available:Job TitleJob Details from the Job Details pop-up XE "Applicant Profile" Applicant Profile XE "User" With this enhancement, when viewing the Applicant Profile, localized values of certain fields on the Applicant Profile tabs display in the user's language if available. XE "Preference" In addition, a language preference field is added to the applicant details section to identify the applicant's language for recruiters.Language Preference XE "Applicant" With this enhancement, a Language Preference field is added to the applicant details information in the header section. This field displays the applicant's preferred language.Job Title XE "Recruiter" The job title displays in the user's language if available. If the user's language is not available, then the values display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Statuses TabThe following information on the Statuses tab displays in the user's language if available: XE "Interview" Schedule InterviewWhen scheduling interviews, the following fields display in the user's language, if available:Display Job Title XE "Organizational Unit" Interviewer's Position organizational unit (OU)Interview guide names in the Interview Guide drop-downInterview GuideWhen viewing the interview guide, the following fields display in the user's language, if available: XE "Competency" CompetencyDisplay Job TitleInterview Guide InstructionsInterview Guide NameQuestionQuestion Details XE "Rating" Rating DescriptionRating Title XE "Application" Application Tab XE "Application Workflow" With this enhancement, when viewing the application workflow sections on the Application tab, the section titles and instructions (if applicable) display in the recruiters preferred language, if configured for the workflow. If the recruiter's language is not available for the workflow, then the section title displays in the language of the user who created the job requisition. XE "Competency Assessment" In addition, if a Competency Assessment section is included in the workflow, the competency model name displays in the localized value, if available.PDF Version of Application XE "Job Requisition" When viewing the PDF version of the application (flattened application), the disclaimer displays in the recruiter's language, if configured and available. If the recruiter's language is not available, then the disclaimer displays in the language of the user who created the job requisition. XE "Applicant" Applicant ExperienceWith this enhancement, applications can include localized values and configurations, which enables applicants to view and complete applications in their preferred language. XE "Recruiter" When viewing application workflows that include translated values, if a translation is available for the applicant's preferred language, then the field value will display in that language. This includes all fields that are available for translation. If the translated values are not available in the applicant's preferred language, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the specific field within the application workflow.Application WorkflowsWith this enhancement, localization options are now available when configuring application workflows. XE "Recruiting" The application workflow is configured in the following areas of the Recruiting module:Application Workflow TemplatesDefault Requisition TemplatesJob RequisitionsRequisition TemplatesTo access the Application Workflow Templates page, go to Admin > Configuration Tools > Recruit. Then, click the XE "Applicant" Applicant Workflow Templates link in the Applicant Tracking section.To access Default Requisition Templates, go to Admin > Configuration Tools > Recruit. Then, click the Default Requisition Templates link in the Applicant Tracking section.To manage job requisitions, go to XE "Requisition" Recruit > Manage Requisition.To access the Requisition Templates, go to Admin > Configuration Tools > Recruit. Then, click the Requisition Templates link in the Applicant Tracking section.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYApplication Workflow Template - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage Application Workflow Templates. This permission can be constrained by OU and User’s OU. This is an administrator permission.Recruiting AdministrationApplication Workflow Template - ViewGrants ability to access and view Application Workflow Templates. Recruiting AdministrationRequisition: Manage XE "Performance Review" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade.RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "Role" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: XE "Applicant Profile" If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.RecruitingRequisition Template – Application Workflow Template - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to set and edit Application Workflow Templates when editing Requisition Templates. This permission can be constrained by OU and User’s OU. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationRequisition Template - ManageGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationRequisition Template - ViewGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationNameThe Name field can now be localized when configuring application workflows. To localize the name:Click the Translate icon. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated name in the desired language.Click Save. This saves the translated name. When recruiters select a workflow template for a job requisition or view the workflow on the Application Workflow tab, the name displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the name displays in the default language of the administrator who created the workflow.DescriptionThe Description field can now be localized when configuring application workflows. To localize the description:Click the Translate icon. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated name in the desired language.Click Save. This saves the translated name. When recruiters select a workflow template for a job requisition or view the workflow on the Application Workflow tab, the description displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the description displays in the default language of the administrator who created the workflow.Section TitlesSection titles can now be localized when configuring application workflows. To localize a section title:Click the Add Section icon. This opens the Add Section pop-up.Enter the section title.Click Save. This adds the section to the workflow.Click the Translate XE "Action" icon to the right of the Add Action Item drop-down for the section. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated title in the desired language.Click Save XE "Application" . This saves the translated title. When applicants complete the application, the section titles display in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the applicant's language, then the section titles display in the default language for the workflow section.Edit Action Item Pop-UpA language drop-down is added to the Edit Action Item pop-up to enable localization of the Title, Instructions, Note, and Error Message fields (the fields that display in the pop-up are dependent upon the action item type). To localize the fields:Select the desired language from the language drop-down on the Edit Action Item pop-up.Enter the translated title, instructions, and note.To translate the action item into an additional language, select the language from the language drop-down and enter translated text into the required fields.Click Save. This saves the localized action item to the workflow. Clicking SAVE is not required before translating multiple languages; the translated values are temporarily retained after selecting another language in the drop-down, and SAVE needs to be clicked only when all desired languages have been translated.Pre-Screening Question InstructionsWith this enhancement, the Instructions field on the Edit Action Item pop-up for Prescreen Question action items can no longer be edited. The edit option is removed from the Application Workflow page.PreviewWhen previewing the application workflow, any translated fields display in the language of the administrator, if the administrator's language is available. If the administrator's language is not available, then the preview displays elements in the languages of the administrators who created the application workflow.Copy Application WorkflowWhen an application workflow is copied, all translated values are also copied. This includes application workflow templates, job requisition templates, and job requisitions.Candidate Search QueryWhen viewing the Reason for Search pop-up in Candidate Search Query, the job title in the XE "Requisition" Select Requisition XE "User" drop-down displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Candidate Search Query, go to Recruit > Candidate Search Query.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Recruiting" Recruiting: Search Candidates XE "Action" Grants ability to access Candidate Search page for recruiting, which enables searching for internal candidates and external candidates who have applied for open positions. This permission also enables the Invite to Apply action item to appear in the Actions drop-down on the Search Candidates - Search Results page. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU.Recruiting Administration XE "Career Center" Career Center - Applications Tab XE "Applicant" With this enhancement, the Applications tab in Career Center displays localized values in the applicant's language when available and if configured for a job requisition. If the localized values are not available in the applicant's language, then the values display in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.My TasksThe following information in the My Tasks section displays translated values when available for the applicant:Task TitleDisplay Job TitleApplication StatusThe following information in the Application Status section displays translated values when available for the applicant:Position Title XE "Career Center" Career Center - Refer Jobs Tab XE "Recruiter" With this enhancement, when searching for jobs on the Search Other Jobs tab in Career Center, localized values of certain fields will display for users if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the values display in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Search Other Jobs tab, go to XE "Succession" Succession > Career Center.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCareer Center - View XE "Resume" Enables users to view the Career Center, including Resume, Career Preferences, Career Pathing and Job Search, depending on enabled components and preferences. This permission also enables users to view the Internal Job Search widget on the Welcome Page and custom pages. This is an end user permission. Talent/SuccessionRefer Your Friends XE "Job Requisition" In the Refer Your Friends section, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Job TitleLocationDivisionJob AdExisting ReferralsIn the Existing Referrals section, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Job TitleJob AdWhen viewing the job ad, the ad displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition. XE "Career Center" Career Center - ResumeWith this enhancement, the job title in the Job Interests XE "User" field displays in the user's language when available and if configured for the job requisition. If the user's language is not available, then the job title displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Note: XE "Universal Profile" As with existing functionality, if Universal Profile is enabled for the portal, then the Resume tab displays in Universal Profile and not Career Center. XE "Career Center" Career Center - Search Other Jobs TabWith this enhancement, when searching for jobs on the Search Other Jobs tab in Career Center, localized values of certain fields will display for users if the user's language is available.To access the Search Other Jobs tab, go to XE "Succession" Succession > Career Center.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCareer Center - View XE "Resume" Enables users to view the Career Center, including Resume, Career Preferences, Career Pathing and Job Search, depending on enabled components and preferences. This permission also enables users to view the Internal Job Search widget on the Welcome Page and custom pages. This is an end user permission. Talent/SuccessionSearch Jobs XE "Recruiter" When searching for jobs on the Search Other Jobs tab, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Display Job TitleLocationDivisionGradeSearch Results Page XE "Job Requisition" When viewing the list of search results, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Display Job TitleJob DescriptionSearch Result DetailsWhen clicking a search result and viewing the details of the job, the following information displays in the user's language, if the user's language is available. If the user's language is not available, then the fields display in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Display Job TitleLocationDivisionJob Ad XE "Career" Career Site ManagementWith this enhancement, a career site language option is added to Career Site Management when configuring career sites. This option allows administrators to select the languages in which applicants can view the career site.In addition, the header and footer can also display localized values by configuring different headers and footers per language.To manage career site pages, go to Admin > Tools > Recruit > Career Sites.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYCareer Site - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage Career Site Management. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting AdministrationCareer Site - View XE "User" Grants ability to access and view Career Site Management. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting AdministrationCareer Site Language SettingsThis section allows administrators to select the languages in which applicants can view the career site. In the Career Site Language(s) field, you can check the Select All option to select all available languages, or check the individual boxes for the languages you would like to include. The languages that are available to select are the languages enabled for the portal. When applicants view the career site, they can select the language from the language drop-down, which is being added with this enhancement. The career site will then update to display in the selected language.Default Career Site LanguageThe default language selected will be the language that the career site will display in if an applicant’s browser language is set to a language that the career site does not support. For example, an applicant’s browser language is Chinese. They visit a career site that has been translated into English (US) and Spanish (Spain), with English (US) as the default language. Since Chinese is not one of the languages into which the career site has been translated, the career site will display for the applicant in the default language, which is English (US).Note: The default language cannot be deselected from the Career Site Language(s) field.Unchecking a Language with Translated TextWhen unchecking a language that already has translated text in the Career Site General Settings section, a confirmation pop-up opens to indicate that the language contains translated information. Selecting No in the pop-up deletes any existing translated text in the career site settings for the deleted language.Search Jobs Widget SettingsWhen including multiple languages for a career site, it is a best practice to select the Display Field option in the Selected Search Fields section for all search criteria that you are including on the Search Jobs widget. This ensures that applicants have search features available to find jobs in other languages.Job Requisitions Not Translated into Applicant's Career Site Preferred Language XE "Application" Job requisitions that are not translated into the applicant's preferred language that they select on the career site will see the translatable values in the default language of the requisition. The application will not display the translatable values in the applicant's preferred language.Note: System fields on the application, such as the field names on the Upload Attachments section of the application, display in the language the applicant selects on their My Profile page in the career site.Career Site General SettingsA language drop-down is added to enable administrators to define separate header and footer content for career sites. The languages that display in the drop-down are the languages selected in the Career Site Language(s) field in the Career Site Language Settings section.Based on the language selected in the drop-down, administrators can configure header/footer information that applies to the selected language so that applicants see the translated content on the career site when they select to view the career site in the associated language. Administrators can also enter a translated value into the Title field.Career site titles display on the Career Site Management page in their translated versions. If a translation is available for an administrator, then the title displays in their language. If a translation is not available in the administrator's language, then the title displays in the default language of the career site.PreviewWhen previewing the career site, the career site displays in the language selected in the Language field.Copying Career SitesWhen copying a career site, all translated values are also copied. If the administrator's default language is not checked in the Career Site Language(s) field on the copied career site, then the administrator's language is automatically defined as the default language. Any translations for the previous default language for the copied career site are maintained.For example, a Chinese administrator copies a career site that has English as the default language, and Chinese is not one of the languages selected in the Career Site Language(s) field. When the career site is copied, the default language will be Chinese, and Chinese will be automatically selected in the Career Site Language(s) field. The previous default language of English will also be checked in the Career Site Language(s) field, and any English translations are copied over. XE "Career" Career Site - ApplicantsWith this enhancement, a language selector is added to career sites to enable applicants to select their preferred language from a drop-down. This allows applicants to view career sites in their preferred language, if the language is enabled for the career site by the administrator. XE "Job Requisition" In addition, the My Profile page displays localized values in the applicant's language when available and if configured for a job requisition.Create New Profile - Language FieldFor portals with multiple languages enabled, a Language XE "Selection" drop-down is added to the Create a Profile page on the career site. Applicants select the language from the drop-down, and the selection will be the applicant's default language for the career site.Career Site Pages - Language FieldFor portals with multiple languages enabled, when applicants are logged in to a career site, a language selector drop-down now displays in the upper-right corner of career site pages to enable applicants to view the career site, search for jobs, and view search results and job ads in their preferred language. To choose the language, applicants select the language from the drop-down and click Yes in the confirmation prompt. This updates the career site to display in the selected language.If the applicant's preferred language is not available, then by default, the career site displays in the default language of the career site.Note: The header and footer only display in the applicant's language if a value is defined in the applicant's preferred language. If the header/footer is not configured in the applicant's language, then they display in the career site's default language.Note: The confirmation pop-up does not display for anonymous users.Change LanguageIf an applicant changes the selection in the language drop-down, the language on the applicant's My Profile page also changes.My ProfileThe following areas of the My Profile page apply to this enhancement:My TasksThe following sections in My Tasks display translated values when available for the applicant, such as the job title: XE "Competency Assessment" Competency AssessmentJob Title XE "Interview" Interview Session Location Title XE "Session" Interview Session Event NameIn-Person InterviewSelf Scheduled Interview XE "Application" Application StatusThe following information in the Application Status section displays translated values when available for the applicant:Position TitleSaved JobsThe following information in the Saved Jobs section displays translated values when available for the applicant:Job Title XE "Requisition Template" Default Requisition Template PreferencesWith this enhancement, the Display Job Title field can now be localized when configuring Default Requisition Template Preferences. To localize the field: Click the Translate icon to the right of the field. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired language.Click Save XE "Template" . This saves the translated text. When other administrators view the template or when recruiters select the template for a job requisition, the text in the field displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for their language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the template.To access Default Requisition Template Preferences, go to Admin > Tools > Recruit > Default Requisition Templates.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYDefault Requisition Template - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants access to manage Default Requisition Template Preferences. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting AdministrationNote: Administrators must have permission constrained to their OU in order to access Default Requisition Template Preferences for their OU. XE "Email" Email AdministrationWith this enhancement, standard and custom email triggers and localizable tags are localized. This allows emails to be received in the recipient's language and also allows email tags to display the translated values, when available. XE "Interview" Interview Guide ManagementFor portals with multiple languages enabled, the name and description on the Interview Guide Management page display in the administrator's language if available. If a translation is not configured for the administrator's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the guide.In addition, when copying interview guides, any translated text is also copied.To access Interview Guide Management, go to XE "Recruiting" Admin > Tools > Recruitment > Interview Guide Management.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYInterview Guide - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to access and manage Interview Guide Management. This permission can be constrained by User. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting Administration XE "Interview" Interview Guide Management - Create GuideWith this enhancement, localization options are now available when configuring interview guides.To create an interview guide, go to Admin > Tools > Recruit > Interview Guides. Then, click the Create Interview Guide link.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYInterview Guide - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to access and manage Interview Guide Management. This permission can be constrained by User. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting AdministrationName/Description/InstructionsThe Name, Description, and Instructions fields can now be localized. To localize the fields:Click the Translate icon to the right of the field. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired languages.Click Save. This saves the translated text. When recruiters view the guide, the text in the fields displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the guide.Default Language RequirementWhen configuring localized values in the Translate pop-up, a value must be entered for the default language in order to save the localized values in the pop-up. For example, if the Name field is translated into French (France), and the default language is English (UK), then the English (UK) field cannot be blank. A translated value must always be included for the default language. Note: The default language is the language of the user creating the guide. XE "Competency" Translate CompetencyFor portals with multiple languages enabled, the Edit icon in the Options column for competencies is replaced with a Translate icon. This allows administrators to translate the competency into multiple languages.To translate the competency:Click the Translate icon in the Options column. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired languages.Click Save. This saves the translated text. When recruiters view the guide, the text displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the guide.Note: If a competency is modified in the competency bank XE "Competency Bank" , the changes are not reflected on the interview guide.Add/Edit QuestionFor portals with multiple languages enabled, a language drop-down is added to the Add/Edit Question pop-up to enable localization of the question and details.To localize the fields, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the fields into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the fields. XE "Rating" Modify Rating ScaleFor portals with multiple languages enabled, a language drop-down is added to the Modify Rating Scale pop-up to enable localization of the Score Display, Title, and Description fields.To localize the fields, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the fields into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the fields. You do not need to click Save before translating additional languages.Once all desired fields are localized, click Save to save the changes. XE "Interview" Interview Management PreferencesWith this enhancement, an Edit icon replaces the Translate icon in the Interview Locations section of Interview Management Preferences. This allows administrators to localize the name of the interview location. This enhancement also adds the option to include a physical address for the location.To access Interview Management Preferences, go to Admin > Tools > Recruit > Interview Management.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYInterview Management Preferences - Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage Interview Management Preferences. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting AdministrationEdit Interview Location Pop-UpThe following options are available in the Edit Interview Location pop-up:Language Drop-Down XE "Applicant" - Select the language from the drop-down. The language selected corresponds to the applicant's language when viewing the interview details from the career site or Career Center.Location Name - Enter the location name, up to 50 characters.Location Address - Enter the address of the location. There is no character limit for this field. XE "Career" Applicants can view the translated location when viewing the interview information from the career site or Career Center. XE "Interview" Interview Manager XE "User" With this enhancement, fields on the Scheduled Interviews and Completed Interviews tabs display localized values, if available in the user's language. In addition, interview guides display localized values, if available. XE "Organizational Unit" If the user's language is not available, then the Location organizational unit (OU) displays in the language of the administrator who defined the localized OU. Other fields display in the language of recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Interview Manager page, go to Recruit > Interview Manager.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Requisition" Requisition: InterviewerGrants ability to access and view past and future interviews and record interviewee recommendations. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a user is scheduled as an interviewer for an applicant, the user will always have permission to view the interview details on the Interview Manager page. Users with this permission can do the following:Access the Interview Manager page. XE "Resume" View the resume and cover letter for applicants for whom they are an interviewer. XE "Applicant Profile" View the applicant profile for applicants for whom they are an interviewer.View the interview guide for the requisition for which they are listed as an interviewer. XE "Applicant" Recommend that an applicant be advanced or not advanced. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingScheduled Interviews TabThe following information displays in the user's language, if available:Interview LocationJob TitleCompleted Interviews TabThe following information displays in the user's language, if available:Job TitleInterview GuidesWhen viewing interview guides, the following fields display in the user's language, if available: XE "Competency" CompetencyDisplay Job TitleInterview Guide InstructionsInterview Guide NameQuestionQuestion Details XE "Rating" Rating DescriptionRating TitlePrintable Interview GuideWhen viewing the printable version of the interview guide, the above mentioned fields display in the user's language, if available.Job Details Pop-Up XE "User" When viewing the Job Details pop-up, the job title, internal and external description, and minimum qualifications displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the values display in the language of the administrator/recruiter who defined the values.To access the Job Details pop-up, click the Job Details XE "Applicant" link from the upper-left corner of applicable pages in the Applicant Tracking System.Create Job RequisitionsWith this enhancement, localization options are now available when configuring job requisitions.To create job requisitions, go to XE "Requisition" Recruit > Manage Requisition.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: Manage XE "Applicant" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingDisplay Job TitleThe Display Job Title in the Details section can now be localized. To localize the field:Click the Translate icon to the right of the field. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired language.Click Save XE "Template" . This saves the translated text. When other administrators view the template or when recruiters select the template for a job requisition, the text in the field displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the requisition template.Description and QualificationsA language drop-down is added to the Description and Qualifications section to enable localization of the internal and external description and the minimum qualifications. To localize the fields, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the fields into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the fields.Note: If there is no content for the default language of the description on the Internal and External tabs of the job requisition, then a notification displays when clicking Next. As a best practice, the descriptions should be translated into the default language for the requisition.Note: XE "Organizational Unit" The Ideal Qualifications section is defined by the administrator when configuring the Position organizational unit (OU) and is therefore not localizable from the requisition template.Job Ad XE "Mobile" A language drop-down is added to the Job Ad tab to enable localization of the job ad for external and internal sites, as well as mobile. Tags are also localized.To localize the job ad, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the job ad into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the job ad.When previewing the job ad, localized values are displayed.Default Language RequirementWhen configuring localized values in the Translate pop-up, a value must be entered for the default language in order to save the localized values in the pop-up. For example, if the Display Job Title field is translated into French (France), and the default language is English (UK), then the English (UK) field cannot be blank. A translated value must always be included for the default language. Note: XE "User" The default language is the language of the user creating the job requisition or requisition template. XE "Application Workflow" Application WorkflowWhen selecting the application workflow template in the Select Template field, the template name displays in the language configured for the field on the application workflow XE "Requisition Template" if the language is available for the administrator creating the requisition template. If the administrator's language is not available, then the template name displays in the language of the administrator/recruiter who created the template.Edit/Delete Translated ValuesWhen configuring the application workflow, the translated values can be edited or deleted to customize the workflow.Clone External Application WorkflowThe translated values are copied when cloning the external application workflow.External Postings XE "Career" When viewing career site names on the External Postings tab, the career sites display in the recruiter's language, if available. If the recruiter's language is not available, then the career sites display in the language of the administrator who created the career sites.Preview XE "Recruiter" When previewing the application workflow, any translated fields display in the recruiter's language, if available. If the recruiter's language is not available, then the preview displays in the language of the administrator who created the job requisition.Copy Job RequisitionWhen copying job requisitions that include localized values, all localized values are copied.In addition, the translated value for the recruiter's default language is automatically populated. This ensures that when a job requisition is copied by a recruiter whose default language is not the default language of the requisition they are copying, a value is included for the recruiter's default language and the default language of the original job requisition in order to save the requisition.Pending ChangesWhen viewing the pending changes for a job requisition, localized values display when part of a pending change.Manage Applicants XE "User" With this enhancement, when viewing the Manage Applicants page, localized values of certain fields display in the user's language if available. In addition, a new Applicant Preferred Language column is added to display the preferred language of the applicant.To access the Manage Applicants page, go to XE "Requisition" Recruit > Manage Requisition. On the Manage Job Requisitions page, locate the requisition for which you would like to manage applicants. From there, click the linked number of applicants in the Applicants column.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYApplicants: Add/Move to Requisition XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to add or move applicants to requisitions the applicant did not apply for. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting XE "Assign" Applicants: Assign Competency AssessmentGrants ability to assign competency assessments to candidates. RecruitingApplicants: View SHL Assessment ResultsGrants applicants the ability to view assessment results. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an end user permission.RecruitingApplicants: Assign TrainingGrants ability to assign training to candidates. Recruiting XE "Candidate Network" Applicants: Candidate NetworkGrants ability to view Candidate Network, which shows with whom at the organization candidates are connected via Facebook. RecruitingApplicants: Compare CandidatesGrants ability to compare candidates against each other Recruiting XE "Email" Applicants: Send EmailGrants ability to send email to candidates.RecruitingApplicants: Status Change XE "Applicant Status" Grants ability to change applicant status for any applicant to whom the user already has access. This permission cannot be constrained.RecruitingRequisition: Manage XE "Performance Review" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade.RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "Role" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: XE "Applicant Profile" If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.RecruitingApplicant Preferred LanguageThe Applicant Preferred Language column enables recruiters to view the applicant's preferred language. The column can be added from the Edit Page Layout page.Note: XE "Career" Applicants define their preferred language on the career site when creating or managing their profile.Add/Move to RequisitionWhen adding or moving applicants to a requisition using the Add to Requisition, Move to Requisition, or Batch Process add/move option, the job title in the pop-up displays in the user's language, if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.Manage Hired Applicants XE "Performance Review" When viewing the Review Applicants page, the job title displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Manage Hired Applicants page, go to Admin > Tools > Recruit > Hired Applicants.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYApplicants: Manage Hired Applicants XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage Manage Hired Applicants and also access the Users page and the Add/Edit User page via the Manage Hired Applicants page. This permission can be constrained by OU. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingManage Job RequisitionsWith this enhancement, the following localization changes are made to the Manage Job Requisitions page:Job Title Search FilterWhen using the search filter to search by job title, localized values can be searched. The search displays results that match the localized search criteria. XE "Requisition" Requisition History XE "Event" When viewing the Requisition History pop-up, localized values display when part of a change event to the requisition. XE "Mobile" Mobile XE "Recruiting" Recruiting features in the mobile app and mobile web will not display localized values.New Submissions XE "User" With this enhancement, the job title and the text in the job details displays in the user's language, if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.See the Job Details topic for more information about viewing localized job details content.To access the New Submissions page, go to XE "Requisition" Recruit > Manage Requisition. On the Manage Job Requisitions page, locate the requisition for which you would like to view new submissions. From there, click the linked number of submissions in the New Submissions column.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: Manage XE "Applicant" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Organizational Unit" OU Localization for Recruiting XE "Applicant" As part of a separate enhancement for the February '16 release, organizational units (OU) can now be localized. Localized OUs appear throughout the Applicant Tracking System (ATS) and can also be selected when using search filters on system pages that include applicable search options.For detailed information about the Organizational Unit Localization enhancement for the February '16 release, see the Organizational Unit Localization Overview topic in Online anizational Units XE "Recruiting" When viewing OUs on pages within the ATS, if a localized value is available in the user's language for the OU, then the OU displays in the user's language. If the user's language is not available, then the OU displays in the default language of the OU. Search FiltersWhen using search filters to search by OU, localized values can be searched. The search displays results that match the localized search criteria.Export to ExcelWhen exporting to Excel, the localized OU value displays. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting Approvals XE "Requisition" With this enhancement, the job title in the Requisition column on the Pending and Past tabs of the Recruiting Approvals page displays in the user's language when available and if configured for the job requisition. If the user's language is not available, then the job title displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Recruiting Approvals page, go to Recruit > Requisition Approvals.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: ApproverEnables approver to access and approve/deny requisitions for which they are an approver. This permission cannot be constrained. Note XE "User" : This is a dynamically assigned permission. If the user is removed as an approver for an offer that is in a Pending Offer status, the user can no longer access that version of the offer. This permission cannot be manually assigned.Recruiting XE "Recruiting" Recruiting Manager/Recruiter Dashboards XE "Dashboard" When viewing the Recruiting Manager Dashboard and Recruiter Dashboard, the job title displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Recruiting Manager Dashboard, click the Recruiting Manager Dashboard link from the navigation tab defined by the administrator.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRecruiting Manager DashboardGrants access to the Recruiting Manager Dashboard page. This permission cannot be constrained.Recruiting XE "Requisition" Requisition Snapshot XE "Snapshot" When viewing the Requisition Snapshot, the job title and the text in the job details displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition. XE "Job Requisition" To view the snapshot of a job requisition, go to Recruit > Manage Requisitions. Then, in the options drop-down for the job requisition, click the Snapshot icon .PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: Manage XE "Applicant" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingRequisition TemplatesWith this enhancement, localization options are now available when configuring requisition templates.To create requisition templates, go to Admin > Recruit > Requisition Templates XE "Organizational Unit" . In the Options column to the right of the appropriate Position organizational unit (OU), click the Manage Requisition Template icon .PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition Template - ManageGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This permission cannot be constrained. This is an administrator permission. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting AdministrationRequisition Template - ViewGrants ability to access and view Requisition Templates. This is an administrator permission. Recruiting Administration XE "Organizational Unit" OU Hierarchy - Manage XE "User" Grants ability to create and update/edit organizational units and custom groups. This permission grants access to all OU types, both standard and custom. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Core Administration XE "Template" Template Title/DescriptionThe Template Title and Template Description fields in the General section can now be localized. To localize the fields: Click the Translate icon to the right of the field. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired language.Click Save XE "Job Requisition" . This saves the translated text. When other administrators view the template or when recruiters select the template for a job requisition, the text in the fields displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the requisition template.Display Job TitleThe Display Job Title in the Details section can now be localized. To localize the field:Click the Translate icon to the right of the field. This opens the Translate pop-up.Enter the translated text in the desired language.Click Save. This saves the translated text. When other administrators view the template or when recruiters select the template for a job requisition, the text in the field displays in their language if a translation is configured. If a translation is not configured for the recruiter's language, then the text displays in the default language of the administrator who created the requisition template.Description and QualificationsA language drop-down is added to the Description and Qualifications section to enable localization of the internal and external description and the minimum qualifications. To localize the fields, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the fields into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the fields.Note: The Ideal Qualifications section is defined by the administrator when configuring the Position OU and is therefore not localizable from the requisition template.Job Ad XE "Mobile" A language drop-down is added to the Job Ad tab to enable localization of the job ad for external and internal sites, as well as mobile. Tags are also localized.To localize the job ad, select the language from the drop-down, and then enter the translated text into the fields.To translate the job ad into additional languages, select a different language from the drop-down and enter the translated text into the job ad. XE "Application Workflow" Application WorkflowWhen selecting the application workflow template in the Select Template field, the template name displays in the user's language if available. If the user's language is not available, then the name displays in the language of the administrator who created the template.Edit/Delete Translated ValuesWhen configuring the application workflow on the Application Workflow tab, the translated values can be edited or deleted. This allows administrators to customize the workflow.Clone External Application WorkflowThe translated values are copied when cloning the external application workflow.Custom Application WorkflowWhen creating a custom application workflow template, localized values can be configured for the applicable fields. XE "Applicant" Applicant Review XE "Interview" When selecting an interview guide in the Interview Guide drop-down in Interview status type sections, the interview guide name displays in the user's language if available. If the user's language is not available, then the name displays in the language of the administrator who created the interview guide.PreviewWhen previewing the application workflow, any translated fields display in the language of the administrator, if the administrator's language is available. If the administrator's language is not available, then the preview displays in the language of the administrator who created the application workflow.Copy Requisition TemplateWhen copying a requisition template, all localized values are copied from the template if localized values are defined for the template. XE "Resume" Resume/CV Review Page XE "User" With this enhancement, the job title and the text in the job details displays in the user's language, if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.See the Job Details topic for more information about viewing localized job details content. XE "Performance Review" To access the Resume/CV Review page from the New Submissions page, click the Resume/CV Review option in the far right column of the New Submissions table. To access the Resume/CV Review page from the Manage Applicants page, select the Resume/CV Review option from the Actions drop-down.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Requisition" Requisition: Manage XE "Job Requisition" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "Role" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: XE "Applicant Profile" If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.Recruiting XE "Performance Review" Review Applicants XE "User" When viewing the Review Applicants page, the job title displays in the user's language if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.To access the Review Applicants page, go to Recruit > Review Applicants.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Requisition" Requisition: InterviewerGrants ability to access and view past and future interviews and record interviewee recommendations. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a user is scheduled as an interviewer for an applicant, the user will always have permission to view the interview details on the Interview Manager page. Users with this permission can do the following:Access the Interview Manager page. XE "Resume" View the resume and cover letter for applicants for whom they are an interviewer. XE "Applicant Profile" View the applicant profile for applicants for whom they are an interviewer.View the interview guide for the requisition for which they are listed as an interviewer.Recommend that an applicant be advanced or not advanced. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "Role" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.RecruitingSuggested Referrals XE "User" With this enhancement, the job title and the text in the job details displays in the user's language, if available. If a translation is not available in the user's language, then the value displays in the default language of the recruiter who created the job requisition.See the Job Details topic for more information about viewing localized job details content.To access the Suggested Referrals page, go to XE "Requisition" Recruit > Manage Requisition. Then, in the job requisitions table, select the linked number of referrals from the Suggested Referrals column.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: Manage XE "Applicant" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Welcome Page" Welcome Page Widgets XE "User" With this enhancement, the display job title for job requisitions can be localized to display in the user's language. If the user's language is available, then when viewing jobs in the Search Jobs widget and the Referrals widget on the Welcome Page, the job title displays in the user's language. If the user's language is not available, then the job title displays in the language of the recruiter who configured the job requisition.Note: XE "Organizational Unit" The Location organizational unit (OU) will also display in the user's language, if available. See the OU Localization for Recruiting XE "Organizational Unit" topic for additional information. XE "Onboarding" OnboardingPrint Forms to PDFPrint Onboarding Forms to PDF OverviewWith this enhancement, clients can now render completed forms as a PDF so that the form can be printed or saved for future use outside the system. A Print to PDF XE "Universal Profile" option is added to the options drop-down in Universal Profile > Snapshot Documents. Prior to this enhancement, forms could only be printed using the print functionality on the browser.Use CasesLaura onboards new hires and ensures they fill out all their new hire forms. After the forms are completed, she needs to print their forms and place them in the employee's file. XE "Snapshot" Laura opens the Universal Profile Snapshot Document folder for a user who has new hire forms she would like to view.For forms that only required an e-signature to complete, Laura simply clicks Print to PDF in the options drop-down to save the form as a PDF to print at a later time.For forms that have question responses that she would like to view, Laura opens the completed form. Then, she clicks the Print to PDF button at the bottom of the form to save it as a PDF for printing at a later time.Implementation XE "Link" Upon implementation, this functionality is enabled by default for portals with Link, Onboarding, or Recruiting and the new Form Management functionality enabled. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYForms - Manage XE "Manage Forms" Grants access to the Manage Forms functionality. This permission can be constrained by OU and User's OU. This is an administrator permission.Note: XE "Form Management" This permission enables access to the Form Management functionality that is part of the Onboarding module. This permission does not grant access to the Old Forms Management functionality.Forms Management AdministrationSnapshot Documents - View XE "Relationship" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - View XE "User" Enables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal Profile XE "Form" Form Option on PDFWith this enhancement, a Print to PDF button now displays at the bottom of each page when viewing forms. Clicking the button allows you to open the form as a PDF, and then save or print the form. The questions and response options display on the PDF. If an e-signature was used, then the e-signature also displays. XE "User" Forms are downloaded as "[Form Title]_[User Full Name].pdf".PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Snapshot" Snapshot Documents - View XE "Universal Profile" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - View XE "Relationship" Enables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal Profile XE "Snapshot" Snapshot DocumentsWith this enhancement, a Print to PDF XE "Universal Profile" option is added to the options drop-down in Universal Profile > Snapshot Documents. Clicking the option allows you to open the form as a PDF, and then save or print the form. The questions and response options display on the PDF. XE "User" Forms are downloaded as "[Form Title]_[User Full Name].pdf". If the form title includes special characters, then the special characters are replaced with an underscore.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYSnapshot Documents - View XE "Relationship" Grants ability to view the Documents widget and subpage within the Universal Profile - Snapshot page. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User's Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. This is an end user permission.Universal ProfileSnapshot Main - View XE "Organizational Unit" Enables user to view the Snapshot page for users within their permission constraints. This permission can be constrained by Employee Relationship, OU, User's OU, User Self and Subordinates, User, User's Self, User's Manager, User's Superiors, User's Subordinates, and User's Direct Reports. Best Practice: For most users, this permission should be constrained by User Self and Subordinates.Universal ProfilePre-Screening: Pop-Up and Retire Videos in Questions XE "Applicant" With this enhancement, recruiters can quickly view an applicant's pre-screening questions, responses, and scores from a new pop-up that can be accessed from the Manage Applicants page. In addition, video files can no longer be uploaded when creating pre-screening questions.PermissionsPERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORY XE "Requisition" Requisition: Manage XE "Performance Review" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade. XE "Recruiting" RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Applicant Profile" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Security" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "Role" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.RecruitingPre-Screening Questions Pop-UpTo open the pop-up, click the linked score below the score bar on the Manage Applicants page.The following information displays in the pre-screening questions pop-up:Applicant NameScore - The applicant's total score for all pre-screening questions displays, as well as the score percentage. XE "Application Workflow" Questions Table - The questions table displays the question details. Questions display in the order in which they appear in the application workflow. following information displays in the questions table:Answer Indicator - This column indicates if the answer is correct or incorrect . If N/A displays, the question does not have a correct or incorrect answer. Note: If answers and scores are configured to be hidden, then N/A displays instead of the correct/incorrect indicator. If only the answer indicator is configured to be hidden, then N/A displays instead of the correct/incorrect indicator. If only the score is configured to be hidden, then N/A displays instead of a score.Question - This column displays the question text.Response - This column displays the answer the applicant selected for the question or the text of a free-form essay question.Score - This column displays the applicant's score for the question. If N/A displays, the question does not have a score.Close - Click Close to close the pop-up.Note: Upon implementation of this enhancement, all existing questions that do not have a score will display "0 out of 0" as the score on the Manage Applicants page. This enables the linked score to display in order to access the pre-screening questions pop-up.Retire Video Upload for Pre-Screening QuestionsWith this enhancement, video files can no longer be uploaded when creating pre-screening questions. XE "Recruiting" Recruiting Usability Enhancements XE "Applicant" With this enhancement, the following usability improvements are made to the Applicant Tracking System (ATS):New Submissions - By default, the page is now sorted by date submitted. Prior to this enhancement, the default sorting was by first name. XE "Career" Career Site My Profile XE "Application" - In the Application Status section of the My Profile page, the default display is changed to applications that are 100% complete. Prior to this enhancement, In Progress applications displayed by default. XE "Resume" Resume/CV Review XE "Performance Review" - The sorting for the list of applicants that displays on the left side of the resume/CV will now be determined by the page from which you accessed the Resume/CV Review page. If you access the page from Manage Applicants, then the list of applicants is sorted using the same sorting method chosen on the Manage Applicants page; if no sorting method was selected, then the default sort for the Manage Applicants page will be used on the Resume/CV Review page. If you access the page from New Submissions, then the list of applicants is sorted by the date on which the submission was added to the New Submissions page.Resume/CV Review - The submission date is added to the page. The date displays in the upper-right corner. XE "Applicant Profile" Applicant Profile - A XE "Hiring Manager" Hiring Manager XE "Requisition" field is added to the Requisition Summary section on the Summary tab of the Applicant Profile page. This field displays the hiring manager for the job requisition.Manage Job Requisitions - The job title in the Job column is now a link that opens the Edit Requisition page. This reduces the number of clicks that are needed to edit a job requisition, though the Edit Requisition page can still be accessed from the options menu.Candidate Search Query in Navigation - The Candidate Search Query navigation sublink will be automatically added to the Recruit navigation tab for portals that do not currently have the link on the tab. Note: The sublink can be removed via Nav Tabs and Links. XE "Security" SecurityThe following existing permissions apply to this functionality:PERMISSION NAMEPERMISSION DESCRIPTIONCATEGORYRequisition: Manage XE "Organizational Unit" Grants ability to access and manage all requisitions regardless of ownership (constraints permitting). This permission also grants read-only access to the Applicant Review tab when creating or editing a job requisition. This permission can be constrained by OU, User's OU, and Grade.RecruitingRequisition: Owner XE "Video" Enables owner to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are an owner. This permission also grants read-only access to video interviews that are completed by applicants via HireVue. For portals with Referral Suite enabled, this permission also enables requisition owners to edit the referral source on the Applicant Profile page. This permission cannot be constrained.Note XE "Role" : This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. If the user is removed as an owner, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Also, if a user has both the permission necessary to manage requisitions and be a requisition owner, the constraints of the Requisition: Manage permission overrule those of the Requisition: Owner permission. For requisition owners that do not also have permission to manage requisitions, only certain fields are editable when editing a requisition.Recruiting XE "Reviewer" Requisition: ReviewerEnables reviewer to access requisitions and applicants for requisitions for which they are a reviewer. This permission cannot be constrained.Note: XE "User" This is a dynamically assigned permission that is not available in Security Role Administration. Once a requisition is in a Closed or Cancelled status or if the user is removed as a reviewer, the permission is revoked for the associated requisition. This permission cannot be manually assigned. Note: If an applicant reviewer is removed as a reviewer via the Applicant Profile page, the Requisition: Reviewer permission is revoked for the associated requisition. However, if the reviewer was also added as a reviewer via the General tab when creating, editing, or copying the requisition, the reviewer still appears on the In Review panel as a duplicate reviewer and retains access to the requisition and applicants from the Requisition: Reviewer permission. See Applicant Profile Page Overview for more information about duplicate reviewer instances.Recruiting ................
................

In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.

Google Online Preview   Download